1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in sec.
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Subsection
1936 Horizontal Scrolling
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1941 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1951 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1957 \begin_inset space \space{}
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1964 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1965 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1966 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1975 \begin_layout Itemize
1977 is used on a small tablet computer
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_inset space ~
2006 \begin_layout Itemize
2007 Math constructs with long command names
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2012 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2014 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2015 windows so that table
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2022 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2027 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2029 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2030 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 \begin_inset Float table
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2046 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2050 Horizontal scrolling test.
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Tabular
2061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Section
2108 Input/Word Completion
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2111 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2162 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2164 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2165 is used to propose completions.
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2169 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2193 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2203 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2213 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2214 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2215 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2216 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2221 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2222 completions available.
2227 key to accept a proposed completion.
2228 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2229 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2230 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2239 ing options for text.
2240 The special math option
2244 enables characters to be composed.
2245 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2246 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2249 , you can then input the characters
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2261 to a formula to get it.
2262 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2263 of the math toolbar.
2264 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2268 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2269 's installation folder.
2270 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2279 \begin_layout Section
2281 \begin_inset Index idx
2284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset Index idx
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2372 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2375 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2379 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2386 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2393 \begin_layout Standard
2397 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2426 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2430 \begin_layout Labeling
2431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2436 LatexCommand nomenclature
2438 description "Tabulator key"
2444 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2446 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2453 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2460 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2464 , especially section
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2471 reference "subsec:Lists"
2477 If you are still confused, look in the
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2490 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2491 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2495 \begin_layout Labeling
2496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Escape key"
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2518 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2521 \begin_layout Labeling
2522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2539 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2540 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2544 \begin_layout Standard
2545 There are three modifier keys:
2548 \begin_layout Labeling
2549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2568 LatexCommand nomenclature
2570 description "Control key"
2574 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2575 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2579 \begin_layout Itemize
2588 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2616 \begin_layout Labeling
2617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2636 LatexCommand nomenclature
2638 description "Shift key"
2642 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2643 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2646 \begin_layout Labeling
2647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Alt or Meta key"
2672 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2673 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2674 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2680 \begin_inset Newline newline
2683 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2685 menu accelerator keys
2688 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2689 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 For example, the sequence
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2759 manual lists all other things bound to the
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2770 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2771 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2772 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2773 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2774 The \SpecialChar LyX
2775 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2776 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2777 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2779 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2795 followed by a capital
2802 \begin_layout Chapter
2805 \begin_inset Index idx
2808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2818 \begin_layout Section
2820 \begin_inset Index idx
2823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2832 \begin_layout Subsection
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2837 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2838 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2839 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2840 numbering schemes, and so on.
2841 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2842 and format the title of your document differently.
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2850 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2851 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2852 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2853 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2854 picks one for you by default.
2855 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_inset Index idx
2863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2872 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2879 \begin_layout Standard
2880 You can select a class using the
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Article for basic articles
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Report for basic reports
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Book for writing a book
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Letter for US-style letters
2927 \begin_layout Standard
2928 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2929 only uses if you have installed
2930 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2931 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 distributions will include
2934 Here are some of the classes.
2935 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2937 Special Document Classes
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2962 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2963 There are three article layouts available.
2964 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2965 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2966 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2967 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 sequential numbering
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2977 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2978 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2979 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 Beamer Layout for presentations
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2988 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2989 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2990 with \SpecialChar LyX
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2998 \begin_layout Description
3000 \begin_inset space ~
3003 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Foils Used to make transparencies
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3016 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3017 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3018 with \SpecialChar LyX
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3024 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3037 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3038 (Is used by this document.)
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3049 \begin_layout Description
3054 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3055 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3057 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 Slides Used to make transparencies
3065 \begin_layout Description
3067 \begin_inset space ~
3070 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3071 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3078 \begin_layout Standard
3079 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3081 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3083 Special Document Classes
3090 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3091 of the document classes.
3094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_layout Standard
3099 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3125 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3127 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3130 \begin_layout Standard
3133 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3138 , are highly specialized.
3140 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3141 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3142 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3143 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3144 by some document class.
3145 There are just too many of them.
3146 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3159 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3160 document class for a new file.
3162 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3165 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 manual for information on how to install them.
3173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3181 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3182 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3183 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 class files to be used for dissertation
3185 s submitted to those universities.
3186 The \SpecialChar LyX
3187 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3189 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3193 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3199 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3206 name "subsec:Modules"
3211 \begin_inset Index idx
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3225 chosen document class.
3226 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3227 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3254 packages or file format converters that are not always
3255 installed by default.
3257 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3258 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3259 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3260 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3262 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3263 file without the missing prerequisites.
3264 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3265 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3282 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3290 \begin_layout Standard
3291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3301 will advise you about these things.
3309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3313 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3318 \begin_inset Index idx
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Document ! Local Layout
3330 \begin_layout Standard
3331 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3332 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 : They are intended to be used in
3334 a variety of different documents.
3335 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3336 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3337 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3338 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3339 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 manual for information on how to use it.
3362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 Each class has a default set of options.
3368 Here's a quick table describing them:
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset Tabular
3381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 You're probably also wondering what
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3854 \begin_inset space ~
3858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3862 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3863 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3868 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3873 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3883 headings, there are also
3891 headings, and so on.
3892 We will describe these headings fully in section
3893 \begin_inset space ~
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3899 reference "subsec:Headings"
3906 \begin_layout Subsection
3908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3910 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3947 \begin_inset space ~
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3962 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3963 doesn't support special options you want to
3964 use for your document.
3965 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 -class and its options, you have to read
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3993 You can choose between the following five options:
3996 \begin_layout Labeling
3997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4002 Use default page style of current class.
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 No page numbers or headings.
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4030 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4031 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4032 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4042 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 -packages ! fancyhdr
4059 How they are defined is explained in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4081 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4088 \begin_layout Subsection
4089 Paper Size and Orientation
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 Document ! Paper size
4100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4102 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 You can find the following options in the menu
4113 \begin_inset space ~
4120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 \begin_layout Labeling
4137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4146 What size paper to print on.
4151 \begin_layout Itemize
4157 \begin_layout Itemize
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 US letter, US legal, US executive
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 To choose whether to output as
4211 \begin_layout Labeling
4212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4222 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4225 \begin_layout Subsection
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "subsec:Margins"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_layout Standard
4257 Paper margins are set in the menu
4259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4277 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4278 the paper format and the font size into account.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4292 That includes the paragraph environments.
4293 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4294 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4295 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4308 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4309 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4310 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4313 \begin_layout Section
4314 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4315 \begin_inset Index idx
4318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 Paragraph ! Indentation
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4331 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4338 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4340 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4345 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4346 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4347 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4351 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4357 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4358 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4359 language than English.
4361 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4366 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4367 into \SpecialChar LyX
4369 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4372 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4374 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4375 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4376 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4384 goes to produce a printable file.
4389 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4391 gives you the ability globally to change
4395 these pre-coded spacings.
4396 We will explain more later.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 Paragraph Separation
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph ! Separation
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4447 \begin_inset Index idx
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4459 \begin_layout Subsection
4463 \begin_layout Standard
4464 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4469 \begin_inset space ~
4474 dialog and toggle the
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4485 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4489 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4490 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4496 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset Index idx
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4520 \begin_inset Index idx
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4536 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4546 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 -packages ! setspace
4562 installed to use this feature.
4567 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4571 \begin_inset space ~
4576 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4577 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4580 \begin_layout Section
4581 Paragraph Environments
4582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4584 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4589 \begin_inset Index idx
4592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 Paragraph ! Environments
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph environments|(
4611 \begin_layout Subsection
4615 \begin_layout Standard
4616 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4638 \begin_inset Newline newline
4641 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4643 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4645 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4654 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 A paragraph environment is simply a
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4667 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4668 scheme, labels, and so on.
4669 Additionally, you can
4670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4677 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4678 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4679 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4680 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4682 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4684 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4689 \begin_inset Graphics
4690 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4696 at the left end of the toolbar.
4698 will change the environment of the
4702 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4703 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4704 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4708 \begin_layout Standard
4717 create a new paragraph using the
4721 paragraph environment.
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 because if you are in one of these environments:
4733 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 \begin_layout Itemize
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4777 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4781 , rather than resetting it to
4786 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4793 reference "sec:Nesting"
4800 \begin_layout Subsection
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 The default paragraph environment is
4810 It creates a plain paragraph.
4812 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4813 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4814 this manual) are in the
4821 \begin_layout Standard
4822 You can nest a paragraph using the
4826 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4834 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 for thanks or contact information.
4860 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4861 places all of this on a separate page
4862 along with today's date.
4863 For other types of documents, the title
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4877 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4891 Here's how you use them:
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 Put the title of your document in the
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the author name in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4912 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4918 Note that using this environment is optional.
4919 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4920 will automatically insert today's date.
4921 If you don't want a date, use the option
4923 Suppress default date on front page
4927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 \begin_inset space ~
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 You can use footnotes to insert
4940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4947 or contact information.
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4964 name "subsec:Headings"
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4974 takes care of the numbering for you.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Section headings ! Numbered
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5002 \begin_layout Enumerate
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5040 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5041 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5042 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5047 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5048 You group the book into chapters.
5050 does a similar grouping:
5053 \begin_layout Itemize
5058 is divided into either
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Not all document types use the
5142 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5147 is the top-level heading.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5160 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5161 labels it with its number,
5162 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5164 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 The unnumbered section headings have a
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 at the end of their name.
5200 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5201 the table of contents, see section
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5216 Changing the Numbering
5217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5219 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5228 in the Table of Contents.
5229 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5231 Just as certain classes start with
5245 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5255 This is something you can change.
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5265 \begin_inset Index idx
5268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5286 you will see two counters.
5291 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5292 numbers a section heading.
5293 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5298 Short Titles of Headings
5299 \begin_inset Index idx
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 Section headings ! Short titles
5309 \begin_inset Argument 1
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5329 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5330 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5331 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5332 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5337 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5338 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5339 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5340 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5345 \begin_inset space ~
5351 This will insert a box labeled
5352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5363 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5364 This also works for captions inside floats.
5365 There can only be one short title per title.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The following information applies to all section headings:
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5396 \begin_layout Subsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5402 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5416 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5417 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5418 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5419 the text they contain.
5420 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5428 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5432 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5441 when you start a new paragraph.
5442 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5446 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5447 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5448 have to change back to the
5452 environment yourself.
5455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5478 time for the differences.
5487 are identical except for one difference:
5491 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5500 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Here's an example of the
5517 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5519 See – no indentation!
5523 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5524 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5525 the other paragraph.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's another example, this time in the
5536 \begin_layout Quotation
5542 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5543 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5544 the first line, then
5548 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5552 you were quoting other text.
5555 \begin_layout Quotation
5556 Here's a new paragraph.
5557 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5558 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5562 As the examples show,
5566 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5567 They should put quotes in the
5572 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5576 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5621 \begin_inset Newline newline
5624 Which I did not rehearse!
5628 It could be much worse.
5629 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5631 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5632 indented a bit more than the first.
5633 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 And make things look fine
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 arg "newline-insert newline"
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5660 does not indent both margins.
5661 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5662 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5665 arg "newline-insert newline"
5671 \begin_layout Subsection
5673 \begin_inset Index idx
5676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5704 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5705 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 lets you provide your own label.
5716 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5717 describing some general features of all four of them.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5725 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5727 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5737 reset the environment to
5741 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5742 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5743 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5751 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5758 \begin_layout Standard
5759 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5760 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5761 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5763 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5764 you read all of section
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5804 paragraph environment.
5805 It has the following properties:
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The items can have any length.
5826 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5827 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 environment inside another
5843 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 \begin_inset space ~
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5864 reference "sec:Nesting"
5868 for a full explanation of nesting.
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5882 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5887 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5890 \begin_layout Itemize
5891 The label for the first level
5895 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5899 \begin_layout Itemize
5900 The label for the second level is a dash.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 Back out to the third level.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back to the second level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the outermost level.
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 These are the default labels for an
5934 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5939 dialog in the submenu
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 \begin_layout Standard
5958 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5959 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5961 \begin_inset space ~
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5967 reference "sec:Nesting"
5974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5988 name "sec:Enumerate"
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6000 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6001 It has these properties:
6004 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6016 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 environment resets the counter to one.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6042 Items can have any length.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6069 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6070 labels the four different levels in an
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 The first level of an
6082 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 Back to the third level
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the second level.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the outermost level.
6120 \begin_layout Standard
6121 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6125 environment, see section
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6132 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6137 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6141 \begin_layout Standard
6142 There is more to nesting
6146 environments than we've stated here.
6147 You should read section
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6154 reference "sec:Nesting"
6158 to learn more about nesting.
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6175 \begin_layout Standard
6176 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6180 list has no fixed label.
6181 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6190 of the first line as the label.
6194 \begin_layout Description
6195 Example: This is an example of the
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6204 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6208 \begin_layout Standard
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 it is meant that the first usage of the
6221 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6223 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6231 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6255 for more information.) Here is an example:
6258 \begin_layout Description
6260 \begin_inset space ~
6263 Example: This one shows how to use a
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6278 \begin_layout Description
6279 Usage: You should use the
6283 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6284 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6286 It's not a good idea to use a
6290 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6291 You're better off using
6303 paragraphs into them.
6306 \begin_layout Description
6307 Nesting: You can nest
6311 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6317 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6318 them from the first line.
6321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6323 \begin_inset Index idx
6326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6341 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6354 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6356 Here are its properties:
6359 \begin_layout Labeling
6360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6365 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6374 of each line as the item label.
6379 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6380 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6381 space as described above.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6387 uses different margins for the item label and the
6388 body of the item text.
6389 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6390 label width plus a little extra space.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space ~
6400 width \SpecialChar LyX
6401 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6402 If the label width is larger, the label
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 into the first line.
6411 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6412 margin of the rest of the item text.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6421 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6426 environment has the same left margin.
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6430 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6440 dialog (toolbar button
6443 arg "layout-paragraph"
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6455 determines the default label width.
6456 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6465 multiple times instead.
6466 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6476 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6484 every time you alter a label in a
6489 \begin_inset Newline newline
6492 The predefined default width is the length of
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 list the same way as the
6516 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6522 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6531 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6532 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6540 reference "sec:Nesting"
6544 to learn about nesting.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 There is yet another feature of the
6552 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6553 left-justifies the item labels by
6555 You can use additional
6559 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6560 justifies the item label.
6565 are documented in section
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6577 Here are some examples:
6580 \begin_layout Labeling
6581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6582 Left The default for
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6598 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6614 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6617 \begin_layout Subsection
6619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6621 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6639 The features described in this section require that the module
6641 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6643 is loaded in the document settings.
6644 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 -packages ! enumitem
6663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6664 Custom Enumerate Lists
6665 \begin_inset Index idx
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6679 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6686 There you add the command
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6710 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6711 Code, look at section
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6718 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6731 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6738 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6739 For capital Roman numerals replace
6751 in the command above.
6752 For Arabic numerals use
6760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6767 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 You can only number 26
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6796 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6806 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6813 \begin_layout Enumerate
6814 \begin_inset Argument 1
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_inset Argument 1
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6904 \begin_inset Argument 1
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 For this list these commands were used:
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6948 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6981 makes the label emphasized and
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7000 lists until you change the definition.
7008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7010 \begin_inset Index idx
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_inset Note Note
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 goes back to default numbering
7061 \begin_layout Enumerate
7065 \begin_layout Standard
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7079 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7080 to indicate that it is a resumed
7081 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7082 , but in the output.
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7106 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7107 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7108 of a normal enumeration.
7109 There, insert the command
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7123 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_inset Argument 1
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 This enumeration starts at 4
7162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7164 \begin_inset Index idx
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7177 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7179 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 with standard spacing
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7193 Add there the command
7197 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7239 \begin_inset Index idx
7242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 -packages ! enumitem
7250 For more information see its documentation,
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7263 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7264 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7268 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7271 \begin_layout Enumerate
7272 \begin_inset Argument 1
7275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 with negative indentation
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 Further Customization
7302 \begin_inset Index idx
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 Lists ! Customization
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7315 You can also change the style of description lists.
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7326 changes the description label font, the command
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 sets the list style.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 An example where the command
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7348 itshape, style=nextline
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset Argument 1
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7382 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7383 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7392 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7393 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7394 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7397 \begin_layout Standard
7398 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7404 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 -packages ! enumitem
7415 For more information see its documentation
7416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7425 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7444 Address: An Overview
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7449 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7457 \begin_inset space ~
7463 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7464 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7465 gags on the document.
7466 In contrast, you can use the
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7478 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7479 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7484 Of course, you're not limited to using
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7506 some European academic papers.
7509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7520 \begin_layout Standard
7525 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7526 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7535 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7536 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7537 Here's an example of each:
7540 \begin_layout Right Address
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 When is it? What is today?
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7566 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7568 the largest block of text on a single line.
7569 Here's an example of the
7576 \begin_layout Address
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 Where do I send this
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Your post office and country
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 As you can see, both
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7606 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7607 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7613 This makes sense, since
7621 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7622 Thus, you have to use
7629 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 \begin_inset space ~
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 ) to start a new line in an
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_layout Subsection
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7666 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7667 or list of references.
7669 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7691 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7692 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7693 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7694 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7708 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7709 The book document classes ignores the
7713 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7717 in a letter document class.
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment does several things for you.
7726 First, it puts the centered label
7727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7735 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7737 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7738 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7739 the subsequent text.
7740 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7742 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7751 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7752 The new paragraph will still be in the
7757 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7758 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_inset Float figure
7767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7769 \begin_inset Graphics
7770 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7783 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 We would love to demonstrate the
7809 environment, but since this document is in the
7810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7817 class, we can't do this.
7818 We inserted it therefore as figure
7819 \begin_inset space ~
7823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7825 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 If you have never heard of an
7831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7838 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7855 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used to list references.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the end of the document.
7881 \begin_layout Standard
7882 When you first open a
7886 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7887 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 depending on the document class.
7904 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7905 Each paragraph of the
7909 environment is a bibliography entry.
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 Each new paragraph is still in the
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7929 \begin_inset space ~
7933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7935 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7942 \begin_layout Subsection
7943 Special Environments
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7948 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7949 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7970 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7983 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7985 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7990 key as a fixed whitespace.
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8012 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8030 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8033 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8036 arg "newline-insert newline"
8053 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8054 So, when you finish using the
8059 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8060 Also, you can nest the
8065 environment inside of others.
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8069 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8076 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8084 \begin_inset space \space{}
8094 arg "newline-insert newline"
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8114 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8122 You must put at least one
8126 in any line you want blank.
8127 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8136 since that will insert
8141 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8144 arg "self-insert \""
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 printf("Hello World!
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 This is just the standard
8186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8203 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8205 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8206 as if you used a typewriter.
8207 \begin_inset Index idx
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 Paragraph environments|)
8216 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8219 Program Code Listings
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8253 environment is similar to the
8258 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8259 computer console text.
8264 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8278 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8279 you can have empty lines.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 have a certain language and a text style
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8298 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8299 and \SpecialChar TeX
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 Because of these properties
8308 works like a typewriter.
8312 \begin_layout Verbatim
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 The following 2 lines are empty:
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8344 environment is identical to
8348 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8361 \begin_layout Section
8362 Nesting Environments
8363 \begin_inset Index idx
8366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 Nesting ! Environments
8373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8382 \begin_layout Subsection
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8388 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8390 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8392 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8394 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8430 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8438 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8455 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8457 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8460 arg "depth-increment"
8466 arg "depth-decrement"
8480 arg "depth-increment"
8486 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8491 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8497 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8498 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8499 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8500 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8506 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8508 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8511 \begin_layout Subsection
8512 What You Can and Can't Nest
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8517 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8522 than a simple yes or no.
8523 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Completely unnestable
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8542 environments have them:
8545 \begin_layout Description
8546 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8547 Can't nest into them.
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Description
8584 \begin_inset space ~
8587 Nestable You can nest them.
8588 You can nest other things into them.
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Description
8655 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8656 You can't nest anything into them.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8777 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8778 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8779 nested section headings violate this.
8787 \begin_layout Subsection
8788 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8789 \begin_inset Index idx
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8801 \begin_layout Standard
8802 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8803 affected by nesting anyhow.
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Figures and tables in
8833 are not affected by this.
8838 Have a look at section
8839 \begin_inset space ~
8843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8845 reference "sec:Floats"
8849 for more information about
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8859 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8872 of its own, it behaves just like a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 paragraph environment.
8881 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 Here's an example with a table:
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 This is (a) and it's nested.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset Tabular
8909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8910 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 This is (a) and it's nested.
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset Tabular
9038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9139 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9155 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 This is (a) and it's nested.
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset Tabular
9177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_layout Standard
9286 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9292 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9293 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9297 \begin_layout Subsection
9298 Usage and General Features
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9303 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 is the innermost possible depth.
9313 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 level #1 – outermost
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9352 both of them in the example.
9353 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9363 For example, if we tried to nest another
9368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9375 , we would get errors.
9378 \begin_layout Subsection
9380 \begin_inset Index idx
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 \begin_layout Standard
9393 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9394 We have several examples of nested environments.
9395 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9400 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9403 \begin_layout Labeling
9404 \labelwidthstring MMM
9405 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #2-a This is level #2.
9417 We created it by using
9420 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #3-a This is level #3.
9436 This time, we just enter
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9451 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9457 arg "depth-increment"
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9469 environment, nested inside of
9470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9478 So, it's at level #4.
9479 We did this by entering
9482 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9488 arg "depth-increment"
9491 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9496 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 \begin_layout Labeling
9527 \labelwidthstring MMM
9528 #4-a This is level #4.
9532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9535 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9540 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9544 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9549 keep nesting things inside
9550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9561 \begin_layout Labeling
9562 \labelwidthstring MMM
9563 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9571 and this is level #6.
9572 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-b Back to level #5.
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-decrement"
9609 , we're back at level #4.
9613 \begin_layout Labeling
9614 \labelwidthstring MMM
9615 #3-b Back to level #3.
9616 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #2-b Back to level #2.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9630 After this sentence, we will enter
9634 and change the paragraph environment back to
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9642 We could have also used the
9658 environment in place of the
9663 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9667 Example 2: Inheritance
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9674 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9683 arg "depth-increment"
9687 \begin_inset Newline newline
9690 which, we will change to the
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 environment, at level #2.
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9707 Notice how the nested
9711 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9715 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9719 \begin_layout Standard
9720 We ended this example by entering
9725 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9729 and reset the nesting depth by using
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9739 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9748 \begin_inset Argument 1
9751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 This is level #1, in an
9765 paragraph environment.
9766 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Now, what happens if we nest an
9789 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9790 label be? An asterisk?
9794 \begin_layout Itemize
9804 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9805 So, its label is a bullet.
9806 (We got here by using
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-increment"
9818 , then changing the environment to
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 Here's level #4, produced using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9840 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9845 \begin_layout Enumerate
9848 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9853 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9857 , because we are in the
9865 environment (that is, it is an
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9886 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9907 to decrease the depth after the next
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9927 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9941 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9946 reset the counter for the label.
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-decrement"
9963 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9964 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9965 into the twofold-nested
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 The same thing happens if we do another
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9995 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10006 The number of other
10010 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10017 The same rule applies for the
10021 environment, as well.
10024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10025 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10029 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10030 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10031 the same detail with how we did it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10048 arg "depth-increment"
10055 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10056 the example in parentheses someplace.
10057 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10058 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10059 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10072 \begin_layout Verse
10073 Now we will add verse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 It will get much worse.
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 \begin_layout Verse
10119 Here comes a table:
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset Tabular
10133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 \begin_layout Verse
10225 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10235 arg "depth-increment"
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-decrement"
10262 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 : level #1) This is another item.
10268 Note that selecting a
10272 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10273 3 times to put the table inside the
10281 \begin_layout Quotation
10282 We're now ending the
10286 list and changing to
10291 We're still at level #1.
10292 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10293 The next set of paragraphs is a
10294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 We will nest both the
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10313 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10317 for the letter body.
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to preserve the depth.
10325 Remember that you need to use
10328 arg "newline-insert newline"
10331 to create multiple lines inside the
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_layout Right Address
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10354 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 \begin_layout Address
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10368 \begin_layout Quotation
10369 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10373 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10374 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10375 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10376 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10377 as soon as possible.
10378 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10383 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10384 with your order, along with payment.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We thank you again for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Address
10393 \begin_inset Newline newline
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 That ends that example!
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10406 gives you a lot of power with just
10408 We could have easily nested an
10429 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10432 \begin_layout Subsection
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10438 Nesting ! Separation
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10446 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10453 \begin_layout Standard
10454 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10456 For example you need two different enumerations:
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10473 \begin_layout Standard
10474 \begin_inset Separator plain
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10507 list item and use the menu
10509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10510 Start New Environment
10513 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10514 ) and behind it the new list.
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Parent Environment
10520 only appears if the item is nested.
10521 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10527 (red arrow in LyX).
10528 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10529 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10536 arg "paragraph-break"
10543 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10546 \begin_layout Section
10547 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10548 \begin_inset Index idx
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10562 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10564 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10565 be broken at the end of a line.
10566 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10570 \begin_layout Subsection
10572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10574 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10593 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10594 ) not to break the line at
10596 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10599 \begin_layout Quote
10600 Further documentation is given in section
10601 \begin_inset Newline newline
10605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10607 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 A protected space is set with
10642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10643 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10645 \begin_inset space ~
10653 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10659 \begin_layout Subsection
10661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10663 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10668 \begin_inset Index idx
10671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 Spacing ! Horizontal
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 The length units are listed in Appendix
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10695 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10706 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10711 \begin_inset Index idx
10714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 Spaces ! Inter-word
10723 \begin_layout Standard
10724 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10725 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10726 at the ends of sentences.
10727 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10728 automatically takes care about this.
10729 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10730 followed by a period; see section
10731 \begin_inset space ~
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10737 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10742 To insert a normal space, select
10744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10745 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10755 arg "space-insert normal"
10761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10765 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10770 \begin_inset Index idx
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10791 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10800 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10801 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10802 inside abbreviations:
10805 \begin_layout Quote
10807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10815 or between values and units.
10816 Compare for example this:
10817 \begin_inset Newline newline
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 10 kg (normal space
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10837 \begin_inset space ~
10845 arg "space-insert thin"
10851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can also insert the following space types:
10859 \begin_layout Description
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10868 space A line with a
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10873 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10880 negative thin space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative medium space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative thick space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10960 em) space between the arrows.
10963 \begin_layout Description
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10977 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 em) space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 em) space between the arrows.
11027 \begin_layout Description
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 cm space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11060 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11064 lists the different space sizes.
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11068 \begin_inset Float table
11073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11079 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11083 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset Tabular
11094 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11095 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11213 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11372 \begin_inset Index idx
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11385 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11386 feature for adding extra space
11387 in a uniform fashion.
11388 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11389 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11390 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11391 equally between themselves.
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11398 \begin_layout Quote
11400 This is on the left side
11401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11404 This is on the right
11407 \begin_layout Quote
11410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 That was an example in the
11444 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11455 is one in a standard paragraph.
11456 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11460 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11467 \begin_inset space ~
11472 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11489 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11560 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11562 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11563 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11567 option in the space dialog.
11575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11579 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11584 \begin_inset Index idx
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11598 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11605 What is correct English?:
11606 \begin_inset Newline newline
11610 \begin_inset Newline newline
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11617 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11654 \begin_layout Standard
11656 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11673 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11680 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11707 That is why it is named
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11717 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11721 \begin_layout Subsection
11723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11725 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11730 \begin_inset Index idx
11733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11754 There you find the following sizes:
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11770 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11771 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11776 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 \begin_inset Index idx
11790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 Document ! Settings
11796 for the paragraph separation.
11797 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11824 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11829 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11830 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11839 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 s are described in section
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11855 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11864 If there are several
11868 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11869 You can therefore use
11873 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11881 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11895 \begin_layout Standard
11896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11907 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11919 \begin_layout Subsection
11920 Paragraph Alignment
11921 \begin_inset Index idx
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 Paragraph ! Alignment
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11936 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 dialog (toolbar button
11942 arg "layout-paragraph"
11946 There are five possibilities:
11949 \begin_layout Itemize
11957 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11963 \begin_layout Itemize
11971 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12021 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12022 the left and right margins.
12023 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12028 This paragraph is right aligned,
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 this one is centered,
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 this one is left aligned.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 Page breaks ! Forced
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12064 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12065 force a page break where you want one.
12066 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12067 is good at page breaking.
12068 Only if you use a lot of
12072 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12073 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12077 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12078 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12082 have to change the page breaking.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12088 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 \begin_inset space ~
12099 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12109 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12111 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12112 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12117 at the top of a page.
12118 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12120 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12121 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12122 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12126 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12130 to learn more about
12137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12141 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12146 \begin_inset Index idx
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 Page breaks ! Clear
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12160 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12161 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12162 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12163 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12178 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12181 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12183 \begin_inset space ~
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12192 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12193 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12196 \begin_layout Subsection
12198 \begin_inset Index idx
12201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12210 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12217 \begin_layout Standard
12218 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12220 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 \begin_inset space ~
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12237 arg "newline-insert newline"
12241 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12261 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12263 This is useful to avoid
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12274 \begin_layout Standard
12275 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12276 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12278 very good at line breaking.
12279 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12280 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12287 reference "sec:Quote"
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "sec:Verse"
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12308 \begin_layout Subsection
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12312 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12317 \begin_inset Index idx
12320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12354 you can insert horizontal lines.
12355 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12356 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12357 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12362 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12373 \begin_layout Section
12374 Characters and Symbols
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12378 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12379 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12380 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12388 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12392 for information on how this is done.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12401 dialog via the menu
12403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12404 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12419 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12420 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12422 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12430 \begin_layout Section
12431 Fonts and Text Styles
12432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12434 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12441 \begin_layout Subsection
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 There are two types of fonts:
12459 \begin_layout Description
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 characters) in the font.
12480 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12481 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12482 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12483 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12484 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12485 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12486 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12487 \begin_inset Newline newline
12490 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12491 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12492 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12493 sizes than at small ones.
12494 \begin_inset Newline newline
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12516 \begin_layout Description
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset Index idx
12525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12531 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12532 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12533 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12534 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12535 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12536 image manipulation program.
12537 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12538 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12542 pixels high up to 34
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12546 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12547 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12548 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12550 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12551 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12552 \begin_inset Newline newline
12555 Bitmap fonts are named
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12563 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12568 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12569 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12570 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12571 use scalable fonts.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12580 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12581 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12582 font to emphasize text, you use an
12583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12591 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12593 In \SpecialChar LyX
12594 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12598 \begin_layout Subsection
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12603 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12612 used its own fonts.
12613 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12614 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12619 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12620 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12621 to a word processor.
12622 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12623 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 files are very portable across
12625 different machines.
12626 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 has increased a lot
12628 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12631 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12639 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12644 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 code in the document
12646 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 engines that are also able directly
12652 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12654 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12656 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12658 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12659 that is installed on your system.
12660 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12663 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12673 es; so you might have to experiment.
12681 \begin_layout Subsection
12682 Document Font and Font size
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12685 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12690 \begin_inset Index idx
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You can set the document fonts in the
12715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12719 \begin_inset Index idx
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 Document ! Settings
12733 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12734 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12746 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12751 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12759 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12760 This requires that you use
12772 as the output format, i.
12773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12777 \begin_inset space \space{}
12780 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12781 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12782 installed (see section
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12794 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12796 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12797 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12802 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12803 cannot determine the family.
12804 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12805 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12808 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12811 \begin_layout Standard
12812 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12813 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12818 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12824 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12825 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12852 European Computer Modern
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12862 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12874 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12875 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12888 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12894 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12895 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12898 \begin_layout Itemize
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12907 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12926 community in order to replace
12930 as the default font.
12931 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12932 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 One difference is improved kerning.
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12970 fonts in (the rare) case that
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12993 Virtual means that it
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13005 -glyphs from other fonts.
13006 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13039 -packages ! aeguill
13044 with the document preamble line
13045 \begin_inset Newline newline
13052 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13058 will fix the guillemet problem.
13063 and that accented characters are not
13067 glyph, but built of
13071 characters, the accent and the letter.
13072 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13078 If you search for example for the French word
13079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13086 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13095 and not for the glyph
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 \begin_layout Itemize
13111 If you do not like the look of
13119 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13140 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13144 serif and typewriter fonts,
13148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13149 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13156 \begin_inset space ~
13165 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset space \space{}
13178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13182 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13206 but you can also select your own.
13207 \begin_inset Newline newline
13210 The differences between roman,
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13222 fonts are explained in section
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13229 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13245 was originally designed for newspapers.
13246 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13247 into the small newspaper columns.
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13256 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13259 \begin_layout Standard
13260 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13273 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13278 depends on the class you are using.
13279 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 Note that the font size is the
13288 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13289 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13290 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13291 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13300 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13314 \begin_layout Standard
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13328 serif or typewriter.
13333 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13343 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13351 LaTeX font encoding
13353 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 -packages ! fontenc
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13377 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13382 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13383 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13391 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13393 Use Old Style Figures
13397 Use True Small Caps
13400 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13405 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13407 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13415 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13419 Use True Small Caps
13421 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13422 of scaled capitals.
13423 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13424 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13432 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13433 a font to display the script characters.
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 So this has no effect for the document language
13468 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13485 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13486 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13488 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 dialog, see section
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13500 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13512 \begin_layout Subsection
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13517 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13518 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13520 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13521 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13522 choose a math font in the dialog
13524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 Document ! Settings
13538 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13539 automatically selects a math font.
13540 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13550 \begin_inset space ~
13556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13561 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13562 document font is available.
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13566 Note that the math font will not be used for
13570 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13576 or by the insertion of the command
13583 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13588 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13589 while the math characters do not.
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13594 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 in the document font settings.
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13615 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13616 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13617 font (in most cases
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13634 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13654 \begin_layout Subsection
13655 Using Different Character Styles
13656 \begin_inset Index idx
13659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 \begin_layout Standard
13679 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13680 automatically changes the character style for certain
13681 paragraph environments.
13683 supports two character styles,
13692 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13701 style, do one of the following:
13704 \begin_layout Itemize
13705 click on the toolbar button
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 use the key binding
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 These commands are all toggles.
13730 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 One typically uses the
13738 style for proper names.
13740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 A more widely used character style is the
13761 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13768 \begin_layout Itemize
13769 clicking on the toolbar button
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 using the keybindings
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13793 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13795 use a different font.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 We've been using the
13803 style all over the place in this document.
13804 Here's one more example:
13807 \begin_layout Quotation
13810 Do not overuse character styles!
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13815 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13816 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13817 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13832 \begin_inset space ~
13835 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 arg "dialog-show character"
13847 \begin_layout Subsection
13848 Fine-Tuning with the
13853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13855 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13875 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13876 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13877 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13878 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13879 from ordinary dialog.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13884 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13885 \begin_inset Newline newline
13888 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13889 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 To use custom character styles, open the
13895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13903 dialog or press the toolbar button
13906 arg "dialog-show character"
13910 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13911 font property that you can choose.
13912 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13915 \begin_inset space ~
13920 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13925 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13926 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13927 environments all at once.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13934 \begin_inset space ~
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 The possible options are:
13965 \begin_layout Labeling
13966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Roman font family.
13972 Normally a serif font.
13973 It's also the default family.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13995 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 This is the Typewriter font family.
14021 arg "font-typewriter"
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 This corresponds to the print weight.
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is the Medium font series.
14048 It's also the default series.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is the Bold font series.
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 As the name implies.
14083 \begin_layout Labeling
14084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14089 This is the Upright font shape.
14090 It's also the default shape.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14108 s the Italic font shape
14114 \begin_layout Labeling
14115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14122 This is the Slanted font shape
14124 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14125 , this is different from italic).
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14140 This is the Small caps font shape
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 Alters the text color.
14154 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14163 , which means that the document default color set in
14165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14172 \begin_inset space ~
14177 is used, you can choose between
14254 \begin_inset Index idx
14257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14266 \begin_layout Labeling
14267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14273 the language of the document.
14274 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14275 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14277 \begin_inset Newline newline
14280 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14282 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14283 When using the spell checking (see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14294 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 Alters the size of the font.
14304 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14305 proportional to the document font size.
14306 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14307 the details, but a general description of what
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size tiny"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14397 \begin_layout Labeling
14398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size small"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 It's also the default size.
14444 arg "font-size normal"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size large"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size larger"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size largest"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size huge"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14584 arg "font-size giant"
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14616 arg "font-size increase"
14622 \begin_layout Labeling
14623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 arg "font-size decrease"
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14660 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14661 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14663 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14664 — use those instead.
14665 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14668 \begin_layout Labeling
14669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 This is text with emphasize on
14690 This might seem like the same as
14694 , but it is actually a bit different.
14700 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14702 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14705 \begin_layout Labeling
14706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14713 This is text with Underbar on.
14719 arg "font-underline"
14725 \begin_inset Newline newline
14730 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14731 when you could not change fonts.
14732 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14733 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14734 because some people
14738 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14741 \begin_layout Labeling
14742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14746 \begin_inset space ~
14753 This is text with Double underbar on.
14759 arg "font-underunderline"
14763 \begin_inset Newline newline
14766 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14767 about double underbar.
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14782 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14788 arg "font-underwave"
14792 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14796 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14799 \begin_layout Labeling
14800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14807 This is text with Strikeout on.
14813 arg "font-strikeout"
14817 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14821 changed in the meantime.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is text with Noun on.
14839 , this is a logical attribute.
14840 Normally it's equivalent to
14843 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14854 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14858 \begin_inset space ~
14861 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 arg "dialog-show character"
14870 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14871 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14874 arg "textstyle-apply"
14878 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14882 \begin_layout Standard
14883 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14890 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14891 (suppose you just set the shape to
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14923 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14931 \begin_inset space ~
14943 \begin_layout Itemize
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Newline newline
14978 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset Note Note
14995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14996 For more on phantoms see section
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15013 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 \begin_layout Itemize
15024 fonts use characters with serifs.
15025 These are the small
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15034 The following example shows the difference:
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 text without serifs
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15050 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15051 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15058 \begin_layout Itemize
15063 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15064 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15065 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15077 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15080 \begin_inset space ~
15085 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15086 the property to be removed.
15087 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15088 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15089 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15108 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15125 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 If you, for example, set
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15160 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15172 \begin_layout Standard
15173 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15174 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15177 \begin_layout Section
15178 Printing and Previewing
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15187 using \SpecialChar LyX
15188 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15189 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15190 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15191 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15193 Additional Features
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15200 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15204 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15205 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15209 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15210 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 to turn your writing into printable output.
15212 This happens in two stages:
15215 \begin_layout Enumerate
15216 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15217 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 a file with the extension,
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 \begin_layout Enumerate
15235 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15236 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 to use the commands in the
15241 file to produce printable output.
15244 \begin_layout Subsection
15245 Output file formats
15246 \begin_inset Index idx
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15258 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15266 Simple text (ASCII)
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15271 File formats ! ASCII
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 This file type has the extension
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15293 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15308 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15316 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15317 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15318 bibliography (section
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15325 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15330 If your document includes such material, use
15332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15361 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15362 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15368 \begin_inset Index idx
15371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15394 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 -Errors or to process it manually
15400 with console commands.
15401 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15402 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15403 's temporary directory whenever you
15404 view or export your document.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -file using the menu
15411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15416 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 export variants are explained in section
15418 \begin_inset space ~
15422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15424 reference "subsec:Export"
15431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15433 \begin_inset Index idx
15436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15446 This file type has the extension
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15468 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15469 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15475 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15476 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15477 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15478 when you view the DVI.
15479 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15485 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15500 The latter option uses the program
15502 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15511 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15512 font access (see section
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15525 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15536 File formats ! PostScript
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 PostScript was developed by the company
15562 as a printer language.
15563 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15565 PostScript can be seen as a
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 programming language
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15585 \begin_inset Index idx
15588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15590 -packages ! pstricks
15600 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15603 \begin_layout Standard
15604 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15608 Encapsulated PostScript
15609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15612 (EPS, file extension
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 As \SpecialChar LyX
15626 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15627 convert them in the background to EPS.
15628 If, for example, you have 50
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15632 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15634 \begin_inset space ~
15637 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15638 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15640 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15641 EPS to avoid this problem.
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 \begin_layout Standard
15679 This file type has the extension
15680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Document Format
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 was derived from PostScript.
15705 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15715 looks exactly the same.
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 (JPG, file extension
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 Portable Network Graphics
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 (PNG, file extension
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15773 converts them in the
15774 background to one of these formats.
15775 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15776 will slow down your workflow.
15777 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15794 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 \begin_layout Description
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15810 ) This uses the program
15812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15815 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15818 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15821 is a new engine, derived from
15825 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15826 access (see section
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15844 \begin_layout Description
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15853 ) This uses the program
15858 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15864 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15865 font access (see section
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15877 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15878 vertically written Japanese.
15881 \begin_layout Description
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15886 (cropped) This is the same as
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15894 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15895 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15896 to generate good-looking
15897 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15900 \begin_layout Description
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15905 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15909 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15913 \begin_layout Description
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15918 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15922 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15923 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15927 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15928 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15931 \begin_layout Standard
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15944 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15945 works without problems.
15946 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15947 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15964 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15974 \begin_inset Index idx
15977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15978 FileFormats ! XHTML
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 This file type has the extension
15998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16011 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16012 When \SpecialChar LyX
16013 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16014 suitable for the purpose.
16015 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 between different formats, which are described in section
16023 Math Output in XHTML
16028 \begin_inset space ~
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 XHTML output remains
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16046 features are supported yet.
16050 and the World Wide Web
16054 Additional Features
16056 manual, for more information.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16062 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16063 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 \begin_layout Subsection
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16085 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16094 or use the toolbar button
16101 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16102 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16109 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16113 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16121 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16126 Further output formats can be selected via
16128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16129 View (Other Formats)
16131 or the toolbar button
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16142 viewer window using the menu
16144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 Update (Other Formats)
16155 \begin_layout Standard
16156 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 To have a real output, export your document.
16162 \begin_layout Section
16163 A few Words about Typography
16164 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 \begin_layout Subsection
16177 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16178 \begin_inset Index idx
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 In \SpecialChar LyX
16203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 character comes in four lengths: the
16226 , and the minus sign:
16227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16234 \begin_inset Tabular
16235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16236 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16240 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16339 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 \begin_inset space ~
16376 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16431 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16437 \begin_layout Standard
16438 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 character multiple times in a row.
16451 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16452 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16487 math mode and has a length of its own.
16488 Here are some examples:
16491 \begin_layout Enumerate
16492 line- and page-breaks
16493 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 Oh — there's a dash.
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16556 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16565 but automatically in the output.
16566 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 \begin_inset Index idx
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 following the rules of the document language.
16585 \begin_layout Standard
16587 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16591 font and with unusual constructs, like
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16601 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16602 This is done with the menu
16604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16613 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16615 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16621 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 would then see the hyphen
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 as a hyphenation possibility.
16641 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16642 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16643 as described in section
16645 Prevent Hyphenation
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16658 \begin_layout Subsection
16660 \begin_inset Index idx
16663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16673 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16676 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16684 When \SpecialChar LyX
16685 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16686 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16688 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 appropriate amount of space.
16695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16700 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16701 gets after another word.
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16706 not work in all cases.
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16720 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16723 \begin_layout Standard
16724 Here are some examples of
16728 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16736 \begin_layout Itemize
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16742 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16745 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 this is too much space!
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16767 \begin_layout Enumerate
16771 \begin_inset space ~
16776 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16788 \begin_inset Index idx
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 Spaces ! inter-word
16800 \begin_layout Enumerate
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16809 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16816 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16821 \begin_inset Index idx
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_layout Enumerate
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16854 \begin_inset space ~
16859 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16860 This function is also bound to
16863 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16873 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16879 \begin_inset space \space{}
16882 this is too much space!
16885 \begin_layout Itemize
16886 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16892 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16894 will take care of this.
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16908 feature described in the section
16910 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16915 Additional Features
16920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16922 \begin_inset Index idx
16925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16926 Typography ! Quotes
16932 \begin_inset Index idx
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 usually sets quotes correctly.
16969 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16970 and use a closing quote at the end.
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16980 The keyboard character,
16984 , generates this automatically.
16987 \begin_layout Standard
16988 You can specify what character the
16992 key produces using the submenu
16998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 \begin_inset Index idx
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 Document ! Settings
17016 There are six choices:
17019 \begin_layout Labeling
17020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_layout Labeling
17044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17047 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17051 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17057 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17061 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17067 \begin_layout Labeling
17068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17081 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17085 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17091 \begin_layout Labeling
17092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17105 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17109 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17115 \begin_layout Labeling
17116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17119 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17123 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17129 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17133 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17139 \begin_layout Labeling
17140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17143 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17147 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17153 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17157 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17163 \begin_layout Standard
17164 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17167 arg "quote-insert single"
17173 \begin_layout Subsection
17175 \begin_inset Index idx
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 Typography ! Ligatures
17185 \begin_inset Index idx
17188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17219 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17226 \begin_layout Standard
17227 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17228 print them as single characters.
17229 These groups are known as
17234 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17235 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17237 Here are the standard ligatures:
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Itemize
17256 \begin_layout Itemize
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17266 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17290 To break a ligature, use
17292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17293 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17330 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17338 \begin_layout Subsection
17340 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17342 \begin_inset Index idx
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17355 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17370 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17373 \begin_layout Description
17375 The name of the game.
17378 \begin_layout Description
17380 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17384 \begin_layout Description
17386 The \SpecialChar TeX
17387 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17391 \begin_layout Description
17392 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17393 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17412 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17413 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17414 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17415 converges to the number
17416 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17419 : The actual version is
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 , the previous one was
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17440 \begin_layout Subsection
17442 \begin_inset Index idx
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17454 \begin_layout Standard
17455 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17456 space between two words.
17457 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17467 for units use the menu
17469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17470 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17480 arg "space-insert thin"
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 Here is an example to show the differences:
17490 \begin_layout Standard
17491 \begin_inset Tabular
17492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17493 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17495 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 space between number and unit
17525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17534 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 half space between number and unit
17559 \begin_layout Subsection
17561 \begin_inset Index idx
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17573 \begin_layout Standard
17574 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17576 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17577 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17578 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17579 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17580 These bits of text became known as
17591 \begin_layout Standard
17592 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17593 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17594 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17595 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17596 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17597 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17599 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17600 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 \begin_inset Newline newline
17620 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17621 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17622 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17630 key "latexcompanion"
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17645 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17646 's page break mechanism.
17649 \begin_layout Chapter
17650 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17653 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17660 \begin_layout Standard
17661 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17670 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17673 \begin_layout Section
17675 \begin_inset Index idx
17678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17694 \begin_layout Standard
17696 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17699 \begin_layout Description
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17705 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17706 \begin_inset Newline newline
17710 \begin_inset Note Note
17713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17714 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17722 \begin_layout Description
17723 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17724 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17725 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17731 \begin_inset space ~
17737 \begin_inset Newline newline
17741 \begin_inset Note Comment
17744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17745 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17754 \begin_layout Description
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17759 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17760 set in the document settings under
17762 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17770 \begin_inset Newline newline
17774 \begin_inset Newline newline
17778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17787 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17788 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17793 of a comment that appears in the output.
17799 \begin_inset Newline newline
17803 \begin_inset Newline newline
17806 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17810 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17825 \begin_layout Section
17827 \begin_inset Index idx
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17839 name "sec:Footnotes"
17846 \begin_layout Standard
17848 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17854 or the toolbar button
17857 arg "footnote-insert"
17869 \begin_inset Graphics
17870 filename clipart/footnote.png
17879 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17880 's representation of your footnote.
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17909 label, the box will
17913 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17914 Clicking on the box label again will close
17927 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17928 and click on the footnote
17943 \begin_layout Standard
17944 Here is an example footnote:
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17963 position where the footnote box is placed.
17964 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17965 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17966 according to the document class.
17968 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17969 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17975 ey are described in the
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_layout Section
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18000 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18010 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18019 or the toolbar button
18022 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18048 appearing within your text.
18049 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18050 's representation of your margin
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18060 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18064 \begin_inset Marginal
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 This is a marginal note.
18077 \begin_layout Standard
18078 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18079 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18080 pages, right on odd pages.
18083 \begin_layout Standard
18084 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_layout Section
18104 Graphics and Images
18105 \begin_inset Index idx
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 \begin_inset Index idx
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18127 name "sec:Graphics"
18134 \begin_layout Standard
18135 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18136 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18139 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18148 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18157 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18158 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18160 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18167 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18174 \begin_layout Standard
18179 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18180 of the image in the output.
18181 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset space ~
18211 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18212 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18220 \begin_layout Standard
18224 \begin_inset space ~
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18233 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18234 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18236 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18241 \begin_inset space ~
18246 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18247 with the image size is printed.
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18251 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18252 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18254 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18257 \begin_layout Standard
18259 \begin_inset Graphics
18260 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18270 the image into a float, see section
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18277 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18284 \begin_layout Subsection
18286 \begin_inset Index idx
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18298 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18305 \begin_layout Standard
18306 You can insert images in any known file format.
18307 But as we explained in section
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18314 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18318 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18320 therefore uses the program
18324 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18325 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18326 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18333 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18340 \begin_layout Standard
18341 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18344 \begin_layout Description
18346 \begin_inset space ~
18349 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18350 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18351 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 Graphics Interchange Format
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 (GIF, file extension
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 \begin_inset Index idx
18375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18407 Portable Network Graphics
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 (PNG, file extension
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 \begin_inset Index idx
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18459 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18463 (JPG, file extension
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_inset Index idx
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 \begin_layout Description
18524 \begin_inset space ~
18527 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18529 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18530 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18531 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18532 \begin_inset Newline newline
18535 Scalable image formats can be
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 Scalable Vector Graphics
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 (SVG, file extension
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18591 Encapsulated PostScript
18592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18595 (EPS, file extension
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18608 \begin_inset Index idx
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18643 Portable Document Format
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18647 (PDF, file extension
18648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18660 \begin_inset Index idx
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18678 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18679 result will not be scalable.
18680 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18694 \begin_layout Standard
18695 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18702 \begin_layout Subsection
18703 Grouping of Image Settings
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 Images ! Settings grouping
18716 \begin_layout Standard
18717 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18719 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18720 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18722 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18723 need to manually change each of them.
18727 \begin_layout Standard
18728 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18757 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18758 and checking the name of the desired group.
18761 \begin_layout Section
18763 \begin_inset Index idx
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18782 \begin_layout Standard
18783 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18786 arg "tabular-insert"
18791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18795 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18796 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18797 from the rest of the table.
18798 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18799 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18801 Here is an example table:
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18806 \begin_inset Tabular
18807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 \begin_layout Subsection
19016 \begin_layout Standard
19017 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19020 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19024 This brings up the table dialog.
19025 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19026 cursor is placed currently.
19027 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19028 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19029 done on all of your selection.
19032 \begin_layout Standard
19033 In addition to the table dialog, the
19036 \begin_inset space ~
19041 helps you in setting table properties.
19042 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19054 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19055 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19056 current cell respectively.
19057 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19059 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19060 of text, see section
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19067 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19074 \begin_layout Standard
19075 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19076 using the check box
19085 This will merge the cells to
19089 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19090 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19091 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19092 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19093 in the last row without the upper border:
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19098 \begin_inset Tabular
19099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19100 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19102 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 \begin_layout Standard
19236 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19237 -arguments for the table.
19238 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19239 explained in the chapter
19246 \begin_inset space ~
19252 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19253 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19254 but are visible in the output.
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 Most DVI-viewers are
19270 able to display rotations.
19278 \begin_layout Standard
19283 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19288 adds lines for all cell borders.
19291 \begin_layout Subsection
19293 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 Tables ! Longtables
19303 \begin_inset Index idx
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 \begin_layout Standard
19316 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19319 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19332 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19333 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19336 \begin_layout Description
19341 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19342 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19343 except for the first page, if
19346 \begin_inset space ~
19354 \begin_layout Description
19358 \begin_inset space ~
19363 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19364 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19367 \begin_layout Description
19372 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19373 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19374 except for the last page, if
19377 \begin_inset space ~
19385 \begin_layout Description
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19394 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19395 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19398 \begin_layout Description
19399 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19400 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19406 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19409 \begin_inset space ~
19417 \begin_layout Standard
19418 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19419 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19420 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19426 In this context, first means first in this order:
19429 \begin_inset space ~
19441 \begin_inset space ~
19446 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19449 \begin_layout Standard
19451 \begin_inset Tabular
19452 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19453 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19454 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19455 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19456 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19457 <row endfirsthead="true">
19458 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19464 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19469 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <row endfirsthead="true">
19489 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <row endhead="true">
19522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <row endhead="true">
19553 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <row endfoot="true">
19586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19606 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21351 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21537 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <row endlastfoot="true">
21568 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21579 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 \begin_layout Subsection
21607 \begin_inset Index idx
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21619 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21626 \begin_layout Standard
21627 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21628 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21629 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21630 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21634 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21637 \begin_layout Standard
21638 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21639 for the column in the table dialog.
21640 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21641 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21645 \begin_layout Standard
21647 \begin_inset Tabular
21648 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21649 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21650 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21651 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21652 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21672 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21741 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 This is longer now.
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21854 This is longer now.
21859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 \begin_layout Standard
21886 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21887 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21892 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21893 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21899 Selection with the mouse or with
21903 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21904 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21905 the selection from outside the table.
21908 \begin_layout Section
21910 \begin_inset Index idx
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21929 \begin_layout Subsection
21933 \begin_layout Standard
21934 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21935 have a fixed location.
21937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21944 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21952 \begin_inset space ~
21957 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21958 too many notes on the current page.
21961 \begin_layout Standard
21962 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21963 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21964 and pages without text.
21965 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21966 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21967 Floats are therefore numbered.
21968 Referencing is described in section
21969 \begin_inset space ~
21973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21975 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21982 \begin_layout Standard
21983 To insert a float, use the menu
21985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21989 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21990 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21992 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21993 \begin_inset Index idx
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22003 paragraph within the float.
22004 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22005 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22006 left-clicking on the box label.
22007 A closed float box looks like this:
22008 \begin_inset Graphics
22009 filename clipart/float.png
22014 – a gray button with a red label.
22017 \begin_layout Standard
22018 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22020 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22023 \begin_layout Subsection
22025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22027 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22032 \begin_inset Index idx
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22036 Floats ! Figure floats
22044 \begin_layout Standard
22046 \begin_inset space ~
22050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22052 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22056 was created using the menu
22058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22059 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22065 arg "float-insert figure"
22069 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22078 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22082 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22083 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22087 \begin_inset space ~
22095 arg "layout-paragraph"
22101 \begin_layout Standard
22102 \begin_inset Float figure
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22109 \begin_inset Graphics
22110 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22125 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22129 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22142 \begin_layout Standard
22143 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22144 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22155 ) and refer to it using the menu
22157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22163 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22167 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22168 vague references like
22169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22176 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22177 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22187 For more about cross-references, see section
22188 \begin_inset space ~
22192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22194 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22201 \begin_layout Standard
22202 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22203 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22204 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22205 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22206 as described in section
22207 \begin_inset space ~
22211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22213 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22219 \begin_inset space ~
22223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22225 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22229 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22230 You can also set the images one below the other.
22232 \begin_inset space ~
22236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22238 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22245 reference "fig:Platypus"
22249 are the subfigures.
22252 \begin_layout Standard
22253 \begin_inset Float figure
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22263 \begin_inset Float figure
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22274 name "fig:Undefinable"
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 \begin_inset Graphics
22288 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22303 \begin_inset Float figure
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22314 name "fig:Platypus"
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 \begin_inset Graphics
22328 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22340 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22347 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22352 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22356 Two distorted images.
22369 \begin_layout Subsection
22371 \begin_inset Index idx
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 Floats ! Table floats
22383 \begin_layout Standard
22384 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22387 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22390 or the toolbar button
22393 arg "float-insert table"
22397 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22398 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22399 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22401 \begin_inset space ~
22405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22407 reference "tab:Table-float"
22414 \begin_layout Standard
22415 \begin_inset Float table
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22426 name "tab:Table-float"
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22440 \begin_inset Tabular
22441 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22442 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22445 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22596 \end{array}\right]$
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22638 \begin_layout Subsection
22640 \begin_inset Index idx
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 \begin_layout Standard
22654 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22655 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22656 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22658 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22666 \begin_inset space ~
22674 \begin_layout Section
22676 \begin_inset Index idx
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 \begin_layout Standard
22690 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22692 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22693 \begin_inset space \space{}
22700 \begin_layout Standard
22701 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22702 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22708 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22709 and its alignment within the page.
22712 \begin_layout Standard
22714 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22724 height_special "totalheight"
22729 backgroundcolor "none"
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22735 This is a minipage.
22736 The text is set in an italic style.
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22743 another formatting.
22751 \begin_layout Standard
22752 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22755 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22759 as described in section
22760 \begin_inset space ~
22764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22766 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22771 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22777 \begin_layout Standard
22778 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22788 height_special "totalheight"
22793 backgroundcolor "none"
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22797 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22798 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22804 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22808 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22818 height_special "totalheight"
22823 backgroundcolor "none"
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22827 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22828 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22836 \begin_layout Standard
22837 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22843 \begin_layout Standard
22844 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22846 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22853 \begin_inset space ~
22861 \begin_layout Chapter
22862 Mathematical Formulas
22863 \begin_inset Index idx
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 \begin_inset Index idx
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22907 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22914 \begin_layout Standard
22915 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22920 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22923 \begin_layout Section
22925 \begin_inset Index idx
22928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 \begin_layout Standard
22938 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22951 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22953 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22954 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22955 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22963 \begin_layout Standard
22964 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22968 \begin_inset space ~
22973 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22976 \begin_layout Standard
22977 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22978 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22981 \begin_layout Standard
22982 This is a line with an inline formula
22983 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22989 \begin_layout Standard
22990 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22991 paragraph, like this one:
22992 \begin_inset Formula
22999 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23002 \begin_layout Standard
23004 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23006 For example, typing
23007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23020 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23021 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23025 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23028 \begin_inset space ~
23036 \begin_layout Subsection
23037 Navigating in Formulas
23038 \begin_inset Index idx
23041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 \begin_layout Standard
23051 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23052 achieved with the arrow keys.
23054 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23055 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23060 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23061 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23069 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23072 \end{array}\right]$
23080 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23085 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23086 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23089 \begin_layout Standard
23094 , printed in this document as
23095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23099 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23106 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23107 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23108 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23113 For example, if you want
23114 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23122 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23136 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23141 , since in the latter case only the
23144 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23149 will be under the square root sign:
23150 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23156 \begin_layout Standard
23157 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23159 \begin_inset Formula
23161 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23170 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23171 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23174 \begin_layout Subsection
23178 \begin_layout Standard
23179 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23180 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23184 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23185 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23186 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23187 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23188 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23192 \begin_layout Subsection
23193 Exponents and Subscripts
23194 \begin_inset Index idx
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 \begin_inset Index idx
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23216 \begin_layout Standard
23217 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23220 arg "math-superscript"
23226 arg "math-subscript"
23229 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23231 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23234 , type in a formula
23237 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23247 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23253 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23257 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23263 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23269 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23278 , you have to use an extra
23282 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23283 For example, if you want
23284 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23290 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23296 Subscripts are similar: To get
23297 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23303 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23311 \begin_layout Subsection
23313 \begin_inset Index idx
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 \begin_layout Standard
23326 Create a fraction either with the command
23332 or by using the icon
23335 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23341 \begin_inset space ~
23347 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23348 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23349 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23354 To move back up, press
23359 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23360 \begin_inset Formula
23362 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23365 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23373 \begin_layout Subsection
23375 \begin_inset Index idx
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 \begin_layout Standard
23388 Roots can be created using the
23391 \begin_inset space ~
23399 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23405 arg "math-insert \\root"
23427 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23433 always produces a square root.
23436 \begin_layout Subsection
23437 Operators with Limits
23438 \begin_inset Index idx
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 \begin_inset Index idx
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23460 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23467 \begin_layout Standard
23469 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23473 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23476 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23477 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23478 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23479 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23480 The sum operator will automatically place its
23481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23488 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23490 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23494 \begin_inset Formula
23496 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23501 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23505 \begin_layout Standard
23506 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23508 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23509 behind the operator and using the menu
23511 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23512 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23514 \begin_inset space ~
23518 \begin_inset space ~
23532 \begin_layout Standard
23533 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23542 \begin_inset Index idx
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 \begin_inset Formula
23554 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23559 which will place the
23560 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23572 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23573 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23579 \begin_layout Standard
23580 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23587 Have a look at section
23588 \begin_inset space ~
23592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23594 reference "subsec:Functions"
23598 for an explanation of function macros.
23601 \begin_layout Subsection
23603 \begin_inset Index idx
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 \begin_layout Standard
23616 Most math symbols can be found in the
23619 \begin_inset space ~
23624 under one of several categories; including
23641 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23645 \begin_layout Standard
23646 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23647 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23648 don't have to use the
23651 \begin_inset space ~
23656 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23658 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23661 \begin_layout Subsection
23663 \begin_inset Index idx
23666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 \begin_layout Standard
23676 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23682 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23688 \begin_inset space ~
23696 arg "math-insert \\space"
23700 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23701 For example, the sequence
23706 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23709 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23711 \begin_inset Graphics
23712 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23717 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23718 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23719 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23720 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23721 , because they are negative
23723 Here are two examples:
23726 \begin_layout Standard
23736 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23742 \begin_layout Standard
23752 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23758 \begin_layout Subsection
23760 \begin_inset Index idx
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23772 name "subsec:Functions"
23779 \begin_layout Standard
23783 \begin_inset space ~
23788 contains under the button
23791 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23794 a number of function macros, such as
23795 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23799 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23807 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23814 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23815 avoid confusions, because
23816 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23820 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23826 \begin_layout Standard
23827 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23829 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23833 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23839 \begin_layout Standard
23840 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23841 are placed, as described in section
23842 \begin_inset space ~
23846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23848 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23855 \begin_layout Subsection
23857 \begin_inset Index idx
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23869 \begin_layout Standard
23870 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23872 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23873 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23874 commands, for example, to enter
23875 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23878 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23879 Our example is entered by typing
23884 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23891 \begin_inset space ~
23895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23897 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23901 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23904 \begin_layout Standard
23905 \begin_inset Float table
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23916 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23920 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 \begin_inset Tabular
23931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24073 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24517 \begin_layout Standard
24518 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24521 \begin_inset space ~
24529 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24532 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24536 \begin_layout Section
24537 Brackets and Delimiters
24538 \begin_inset Index idx
24541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24548 \begin_inset Index idx
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24560 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24567 \begin_layout Standard
24568 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24570 For some purposes, using just the keys
24575 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24576 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24577 toolbar delimiter icon
24580 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24584 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24585 \begin_inset Formula
24587 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24595 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24596 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24600 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24603 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24609 \begin_inset Formula
24611 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24619 \begin_layout Standard
24620 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24621 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24625 \begin_layout Standard
24626 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24627 left side and right side.
24628 If you use the option
24631 \begin_inset space ~
24636 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24637 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24639 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24644 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24645 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24648 \begin_layout Standard
24649 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24650 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24651 is to go inside the brackets.
24652 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24657 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24658 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24659 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24663 arg "math-delim ( )"
24669 \begin_layout Section
24670 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24671 \begin_inset Index idx
24674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 \begin_inset Index idx
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 \begin_inset Index idx
24694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24703 \begin_layout Standard
24704 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24708 \begin_inset space ~
24716 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24720 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24721 Here is an example:
24722 \begin_inset Formula
24724 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24733 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24734 \begin_inset space ~
24738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24740 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24745 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24746 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24747 This alignment is set in the box
24752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24801 for every column as default.
24802 For example, the sequence
24803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24814 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24815 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24816 corresponds to the relevant column.
24817 The result will look like this:
24818 \begin_inset Formula
24821 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24822 column & has & has\,right\\
24823 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24832 \begin_layout Standard
24833 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24836 arg "newline-insert newline"
24839 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24840 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24842 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24845 or the math toolbar.
24848 \begin_layout Standard
24849 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24850 It can be created with the menu
24852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24853 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24855 \begin_inset space ~
24867 Here is an example:
24868 \begin_inset Formula
24882 \begin_layout Standard
24883 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24886 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24889 arg "newline-insert newline"
24893 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24898 arg "newline-insert newline"
24901 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24909 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24910 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24911 A new row is created by every further entry of
24914 arg "newline-insert newline"
24918 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24919 Here is an example:
24920 \begin_inset Formula
24922 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24923 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24928 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24929 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24930 \begin_inset Formula
24932 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24940 \begin_layout Standard
24941 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24948 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24949 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24952 reference "eq:asquared"
24957 The other types are described in section
24958 \begin_inset space ~
24962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24964 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24971 \begin_layout Section
24972 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24973 \begin_inset Index idx
24976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24977 Math ! Formula numbering
24983 \begin_inset Index idx
24986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 Math ! Referencing formulas
24993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24995 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25002 \begin_layout Standard
25003 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25005 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25006 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25008 \begin_inset space ~
25012 \begin_inset space ~
25020 arg "math-number-toggle"
25024 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25025 within parentheses.
25026 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25027 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25028 the document class.
25029 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25030 separated by a dot:
25031 \begin_inset Formula
25041 arg "math-number-toggle"
25044 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25045 You can only number displayed formulas.
25048 \begin_layout Standard
25049 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25051 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25052 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25066 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25069 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25070 \begin_inset Formula
25073 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25079 To number all lines use the shortcut
25082 arg "math-number-toggle"
25088 \begin_layout Standard
25089 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25092 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25093 A label is inserted with the menu
25095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25104 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25105 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25106 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25118 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25119 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25120 We inserted in the following example the label
25121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25128 in the second line:
25129 \begin_inset Formula
25131 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25132 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25137 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25138 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25139 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25143 \begin_inset space ~
25151 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25155 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25156 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25157 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25158 as the formula number:
25161 \begin_layout Standard
25162 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25165 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25172 \begin_layout Standard
25173 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25174 's cross-reference box are described in section
25175 \begin_inset space ~
25179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25181 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25186 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25194 \begin_layout Section
25195 User defined math macros
25196 \begin_inset Index idx
25199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 \begin_layout Standard
25210 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25211 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25212 Math macros are explained in section
25215 \begin_inset space ~
25227 \begin_layout Section
25231 \begin_layout Subsection
25233 \begin_inset Index idx
25236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 \begin_layout Standard
25246 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25247 To set a font in a formula, use the
25250 \begin_inset space ~
25258 arg "math-insert \\font"
25261 , or enter its command, listed in table
25262 \begin_inset space ~
25266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25268 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25275 \begin_layout Standard
25276 \begin_inset Float table
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25287 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25291 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 \begin_inset Tabular
25302 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25303 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25424 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25512 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25573 \begin_layout Standard
25574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25599 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25600 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25605 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25606 space when you need a space in the box.
25607 Here is an example where
25608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25619 denotes the set of numbers:
25620 \begin_inset Formula
25622 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25630 \begin_layout Standard
25631 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25632 You can, for example, put a character in
25641 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25645 \begin_inset Newline newline
25648 So it is better not to use this feature.
25651 \begin_layout Standard
25652 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25653 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25657 \begin_inset Newline newline
25660 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25666 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25667 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25673 \begin_layout Standard
25680 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25683 \begin_layout Standard
25684 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25686 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25687 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25689 \begin_inset space ~
25697 \begin_layout Subsection
25699 \begin_inset Index idx
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25711 \begin_layout Standard
25712 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25714 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25718 \begin_inset space ~
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25730 \begin_inset space ~
25738 arg "math-insert \\font"
25742 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25743 in black instead of blue.
25744 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25745 Here is an example:
25746 \begin_inset Formula
25749 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25750 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25759 \begin_layout Subsection
25761 \begin_inset Index idx
25764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25773 \begin_layout Standard
25774 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25775 automatically chosen in most situations.
25793 For most characters,
25801 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25802 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25807 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25808 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25809 thinks are appropriate.
25810 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25813 arg "math-insert \\style"
25817 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25818 For example, you can set
25819 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25822 , which is normally in
25831 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25835 The four styles are used in the following example:
25838 \begin_layout Standard
25839 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25843 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25851 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25857 \begin_layout Standard
25858 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25859 is set in a particular size with the menu
25861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25863 \begin_inset space ~
25868 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25869 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25870 will be adjusted to correspond.
25871 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25882 \begin_layout Standard
25886 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25892 \begin_layout Section
25893 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25895 \begin_inset Index idx
25898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25905 \begin_inset Index idx
25908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25917 \begin_layout Standard
25919 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25920 that are in common use.
25923 \begin_layout Subsection
25924 Enabling AMS-Support
25927 \begin_layout Standard
25928 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25929 the document by selecting the checkbox
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25940 \begin_inset space ~
25947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25951 \begin_inset Index idx
25954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25955 Document ! Settings
25963 \begin_inset space ~
25969 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25970 -errors in formulas,
25971 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25974 \begin_layout Subsection
25976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25978 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25983 \begin_inset Index idx
25986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25987 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25995 \begin_layout Standard
25996 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25997 provides a selection of different formula types.
25999 allows you to choose between
26020 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26021 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26027 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26030 \begin_layout Chapter
26034 \begin_layout Section
26036 \begin_inset Index idx
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26048 name "sec:Cross-References"
26055 \begin_layout Standard
26056 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26057 's strengths is cross-references.
26058 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26060 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26061 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26062 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26065 \begin_layout Enumerate
26069 \begin_layout Enumerate
26070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26072 name "enu:Second-item"
26079 \begin_layout Enumerate
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26089 or by pressing the toolbar button
26096 A gray label box like this:
26097 \begin_inset Graphics
26098 filename clipart/label.png
26103 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26105 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26140 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26141 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26157 \begin_layout Standard
26158 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26163 or the toolbar button
26166 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26170 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26171 \begin_inset Graphics
26172 filename clipart/reference.png
26177 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26179 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26192 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26196 \begin_layout Standard
26197 As an alternative to
26199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26202 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26207 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26208 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26210 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26222 \begin_layout Standard
26223 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26224 \begin_inset space ~
26228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26230 reference "enu:Second-item"
26237 \begin_layout Standard
26238 It is recommended to use a protected space
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26243 described in section
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26250 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26259 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26260 line breaks between them.
26263 \begin_layout Standard
26264 There are six formats of cross-references:
26267 \begin_layout Description
26268 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26271 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26278 \begin_layout Description
26279 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26280 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26292 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26299 \begin_layout Description
26300 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26301 \begin_inset space ~
26305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26306 LatexCommand pageref
26307 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26314 \begin_layout Description
26316 \begin_inset space ~
26320 \begin_inset space ~
26323 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26325 LatexCommand vpageref
26326 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26331 \begin_inset Newline newline
26334 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26335 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26336 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26337 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26338 it prints “on the next page”.
26339 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26342 \begin_layout Description
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26348 \begin_inset space ~
26352 \begin_inset space ~
26355 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26358 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26363 \begin_inset Newline newline
26366 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26372 ; otherwise it behaves like
26376 \begin_inset space ~
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26389 \begin_layout Description
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26394 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26395 \begin_inset Newline newline
26399 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26407 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26417 \begin_inset Index idx
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26422 -packages ! prettyref
26428 \begin_inset Index idx
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26433 -packages ! refstyle
26444 \begin_inset Newline newline
26447 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26448 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26451 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26456 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26464 is the default and preferred because
26468 supports only English documents.
26469 The format is specified by using the command
26481 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26482 preamble of the document.
26483 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26496 ) can be done with this command
26497 \begin_inset Newline newline
26504 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26509 \begin_inset Newline newline
26512 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26516 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26523 \begin_layout Description
26525 \begin_inset space ~
26528 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26530 LatexCommand nameref
26531 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26538 \begin_layout Standard
26539 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26540 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26542 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26546 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26550 \begin_layout Standard
26551 You can only use the style
26555 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26559 is always possible.
26562 \begin_layout Standard
26563 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26564 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26566 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26567 \begin_inset space ~
26571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26573 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26580 \begin_layout Standard
26581 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26585 \begin_inset space ~
26589 \begin_inset space ~
26594 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26595 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26598 \begin_inset space ~
26603 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26604 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26607 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 You can change labels at any time.
26615 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26616 do not need to think about this.
26619 \begin_layout Standard
26620 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26622 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26626 \begin_layout Standard
26627 References are described in detail in the section
26628 \begin_inset space ~
26638 \begin_inset space ~
26646 \begin_layout Section
26647 Table of Contents and other Listings
26648 \begin_inset Index idx
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 \begin_inset Index idx
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 Navigating ! Outline
26668 \begin_inset Index idx
26671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26687 \begin_layout Subsection
26689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26691 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26698 \begin_layout Standard
26699 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26702 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26704 \begin_inset space ~
26708 \begin_inset space ~
26714 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26716 If you click on it, the
26720 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26721 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26722 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26724 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26726 \begin_inset space ~
26731 that is described in section
26732 \begin_inset space ~
26736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26738 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26745 \begin_layout Standard
26746 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26747 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26749 \begin_inset space ~
26753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26755 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26759 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26761 \begin_inset space ~
26765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26767 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26771 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26773 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26776 \begin_layout Subsection
26777 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26780 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26787 \begin_layout Standard
26788 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26790 You can insert them via the
26792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26796 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26799 \begin_layout Section
26800 URLs and Hyperlinks
26801 \begin_inset Index idx
26804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26811 \begin_inset Index idx
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 \begin_layout Subsection
26825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26834 \begin_layout Standard
26835 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26843 \begin_layout Standard
26844 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26846 \begin_inset Flex URL
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26859 \begin_layout Standard
26860 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26866 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26870 \begin_layout Standard
26871 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26879 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26888 \begin_layout Subsection
26890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26892 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26899 \begin_layout Standard
26900 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26905 or with the toolbar button
26912 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26921 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26922 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26923 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26925 name "LyX's homepage"
26926 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26930 , an Email address like this:
26931 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26933 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26934 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26939 , or a link to a file.
26942 \begin_layout Standard
26943 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26956 to the link target.
26959 \begin_layout Standard
26960 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26961 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26962 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26963 the text style dialog.
26964 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26970 name "LyX's homepage"
26971 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26983 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26990 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26992 \begin_inset Newline newline
27000 \begin_inset Newline newline
27007 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27010 \begin_layout Section
27012 \begin_inset Index idx
27015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27024 name "sec:Appendices"
27031 \begin_layout Standard
27032 Appendices are created with the menu
27034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27036 \begin_inset space ~
27040 \begin_inset space ~
27046 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27047 as the appendix part of the book.
27048 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27051 \begin_layout Standard
27052 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27053 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27054 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27055 and the subsection number.
27056 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27060 \begin_layout Standard
27062 \begin_inset space ~
27066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27068 reference "chap:Credits"
27073 \begin_inset space ~
27077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27079 reference "subsec:Export"
27086 \begin_layout Section
27088 \begin_inset Index idx
27091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27100 name "sec:Bibliography"
27107 \begin_layout Standard
27108 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27110 You can include a bibliography database,
27114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27115 Known under the name
27116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27119 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27129 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27130 manually, using the paragraph environment
27134 , which was described in section
27135 \begin_inset space ~
27139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27141 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27146 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27147 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27151 use a bibliography database.
27154 \begin_layout Subsection
27155 The Bibliography Environment
27158 \begin_layout Standard
27163 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27165 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27174 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27176 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27186 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27195 or the toolbar button
27198 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27202 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27203 containing the available citations.
27204 Select one or more keys from the list and
27214 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27215 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27219 \begin_layout Standard
27220 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27221 entry with surrounding brackets.
27226 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27227 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27239 \begin_layout Standard
27243 Companion Second Edition
27246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27248 key "latexcompanion"
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 The \SpecialChar LyX
27257 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27267 \begin_layout Standard
27268 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27271 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27273 \begin_inset space ~
27281 arg "layout-paragraph"
27285 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27288 \begin_layout Subsection
27289 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27291 \begin_inset Index idx
27294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27295 Bibliography ! Databases
27301 \begin_inset Index idx
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27305 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27314 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27321 \begin_layout Standard
27322 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27330 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27331 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27336 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27338 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27339 your working field in a database.
27340 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27341 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27342 list for that document.
27343 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27347 \begin_layout Standard
27348 The database is a text file with the file extension
27349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27360 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27361 The format is explained in
27362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27368 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27370 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27372 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27377 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27378 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27379 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27381 \begin_inset Flex URL
27384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27386 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27395 To use a database, use the menu
27397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27402 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27404 \begin_inset space ~
27410 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27411 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27418 Add bibliography to TOC
27420 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27425 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27426 in the document or just the cited references.
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27442 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27443 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27444 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27445 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27447 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27454 \begin_inset Newline newline
27458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27460 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27473 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27476 \begin_layout Standard
27477 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27478 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27480 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27494 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27499 The following variants are possible:
27502 \begin_layout Description
27503 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27504 with other bibliography packages (e.
27505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27509 \begin_inset space \space{}
27516 ), only with the package
27520 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27524 \begin_layout Description
27525 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27526 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27527 with all bibliography packages, except
27532 \begin_layout Description
27533 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27538 , works with all bibliography packages
27541 \begin_layout Standard
27542 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27543 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27545 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27548 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27552 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27561 \begin_layout Standard
27562 When you select the option
27564 Sectioned bibliography
27568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27569 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27572 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27573 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27575 Customizing Bibliographies
27579 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27584 Additional Features
27589 \begin_layout Standard
27590 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27591 the two methods of creating them.
27592 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27593 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27594 We used the style file
27598 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27601 \begin_layout Subsection
27603 \begin_inset Index idx
27606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27607 Bibliography ! Citation format
27615 \begin_layout Standard
27616 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27617 For this feature you need to enable the option
27623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27627 \begin_inset Index idx
27630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27631 Document ! Settings
27641 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27642 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27643 style files as explained in
27644 the previous section.
27647 \begin_layout Standard
27648 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27649 the citation reference window.
27650 Here is an example where the text
27651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27655 \begin_inset space ~
27659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27662 appears after the reference:
27665 \begin_layout Standard
27667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27670 key "latexcompanion"
27677 \begin_layout Section
27679 \begin_inset Index idx
27682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27699 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27703 \begin_inset space ~
27708 or the toolbar button
27715 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27716 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27717 by \SpecialChar LyX
27718 as the index entry.
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27725 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27727 \begin_inset space ~
27733 A light blue box labeled
27734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27745 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27746 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27750 \begin_layout Standard
27751 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27752 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27753 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27754 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27758 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27765 \begin_layout Subsection
27766 Grouping Index Entries
27767 \begin_inset Index idx
27770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27779 \begin_layout Standard
27780 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27782 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27783 lists under the entry
27784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27792 First we create the entry
27793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27801 \begin_inset space ~
27805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27807 reference "subsec:Lists"
27812 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27813 \begin_inset space ~
27817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27819 reference "sec:Itemize"
27823 , we insert the command
27826 \begin_layout Standard
27832 \begin_layout Standard
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27842 \begin_layout Standard
27843 for the enumerated list in section
27844 \begin_inset space ~
27848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27850 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27857 \begin_layout Standard
27858 The exclamation mark
27859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27866 marks the grouping levels.
27867 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27868 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27869 If we don't have an index entry for
27870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27877 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27880 \begin_layout Subsection
27882 \begin_inset Index idx
27885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27886 Index ! Page ranges
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27897 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27898 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27899 an index entry in section
27900 \begin_inset space ~
27904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27906 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27916 Paragraph environments|(
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27920 and another entry at the end of section
27921 \begin_inset space ~
27925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27927 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27937 Paragraph environments|)
27940 \begin_layout Standard
27942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27965 respectively start and end the index range.
27966 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27967 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27968 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27969 An example is the index entry
27970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27973 Document ! Settings
27974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27980 \begin_layout Subsection
27982 \begin_inset Index idx
27985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 Index ! Cross referencing
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27996 We referred for example in the index entry
27997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28005 \begin_inset space ~
28009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28011 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28015 ) to the index entry
28016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28023 in the same section using the entry
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28029 GIF|see{Image formats}
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28033 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28035 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28036 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28039 \begin_layout Subsection
28041 \begin_inset Index idx
28044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28045 Index ! Entry order
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28054 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28055 follow the rules for the index order.
28056 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28062 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28064 \begin_inset space ~
28068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28070 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28079 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28080 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28105 \begin_inset Index idx
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 Dummy entries ! maïs
28115 \begin_inset Index idx
28118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28119 Dummy entries ! maître
28125 \begin_inset Index idx
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28134 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28135 maïs, maison, maître.
28136 To achieve this, we use the command
28139 \begin_layout Standard
28142 previous entry@current entry
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 In our case we want to have
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28162 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28173 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28175 See the next subsection for an example.
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28179 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28186 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28191 to generate the index (see sec.
28192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28198 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28207 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28208 -package aeguill in sec.
28209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28215 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28219 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28220 -packages although all these index
28221 commands start with
28222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28235 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28240 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28255 \begin_layout Standard
28267 \begin_layout Subsection
28269 \begin_inset Index idx
28272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28273 Index ! Entry layout
28281 \begin_layout Standard
28282 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28283 \begin_inset Index idx
28286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28289 This is an italic dummy entry
28294 You can also format the page number using the character
28295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28302 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28303 -command without a backslash.
28304 We can write for example
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28310 italic page number:|textit
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28314 to get the page number in italic.
28315 \begin_inset Index idx
28318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28324 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28325 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28349 Have a look at section
28350 \begin_inset space ~
28354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28356 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28360 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28373 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28377 to generate the index, see sec.
28378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28384 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28393 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28398 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28402 key "latexcompanion"
28414 \begin_layout Standard
28415 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28417 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28418 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28419 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28420 If so, put the following in the preamble
28423 \begin_layout Standard
28435 \begin_layout Standard
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28445 \begin_layout Standard
28446 in the index entry.
28447 \begin_inset Index idx
28450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28451 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28456 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28457 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28458 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28461 \begin_layout Standard
28462 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28463 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28464 a bold font for all index entries.
28465 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28477 documentation for details,
28478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28480 key "makeindex,xindy"
28487 \begin_layout Subsection
28489 \begin_inset Index idx
28492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28501 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28508 \begin_layout Standard
28509 If the index generation program
28513 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28514 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28518 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28519 distribution, is used.
28523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28528 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28529 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28530 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28531 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28532 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28542 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28544 dialog, see section
28545 \begin_inset space ~
28549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28551 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28556 The available options are listed and explained in
28557 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28559 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28564 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28570 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28578 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28579 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28582 \begin_layout Subsection
28586 \begin_layout Standard
28587 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28588 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28596 next to the standard index.
28598 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28599 that add this feature.
28606 \begin_inset Index idx
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28611 -packages ! splitidx
28616 package to generate multiple indexes.
28617 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28623 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28632 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28633 style, but it also includes
28634 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28635 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28643 \begin_layout Standard
28644 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28645 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28648 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28651 and select the option
28653 Use multiple Indexes
28660 already contains the standard index
28661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28669 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28670 also appear as a heading) to the
28674 input field and press the
28679 The new index now also appears in the list.
28680 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28681 label color to the new index.
28684 \begin_layout Standard
28685 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28695 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28696 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28697 are additional features:
28700 \begin_layout Itemize
28701 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28702 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28705 \begin_layout Itemize
28706 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28707 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28715 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28716 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28717 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28718 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28721 \begin_layout Section
28722 Nomenclature/Glossary
28723 \begin_inset Index idx
28726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 \begin_inset Index idx
28736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28767 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28774 \begin_layout Standard
28775 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28776 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28777 called nomenclature or glossary.
28780 \begin_layout Standard
28781 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28788 \begin_inset Index idx
28791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28793 -packages ! nomencl
28799 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28801 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28807 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28811 \begin_layout Standard
28812 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28813 and then use the menu
28815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28821 \begin_inset space ~
28826 or the toolbar button
28829 arg "nomencl-insert"
28834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28845 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28848 \begin_layout Standard
28849 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28850 The first is the term or
28854 that you wish to define.
28859 of the term or symbol.
28862 \begin_layout Standard
28863 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28871 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28872 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28880 \begin_layout Subsection
28881 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28882 \begin_inset Index idx
28885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28886 Nomenclature ! Layout
28894 \begin_layout Standard
28895 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28899 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28906 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28914 \begin_inset Newline newline
28922 \begin_inset Newline newline
28928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28935 character starts/ends the formula.
28936 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28937 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28949 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28961 -syntax is given in section
28962 \begin_inset space ~
28966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28968 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28975 \begin_layout Standard
28979 \begin_inset space ~
28984 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28986 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28991 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28998 in this document is:
28999 \begin_inset Newline newline
29004 dummy entry for the character
29009 \begin_inset Newline newline
29021 \begin_inset space ~
29031 font use the command
29060 \begin_layout Standard
29061 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29066 \begin_inset space \space{}
29070 \begin_inset Newline newline
29086 \begin_inset Newline newline
29089 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29090 This command will make the font of all symbols
29097 \begin_inset space ~
29105 \begin_layout Standard
29106 If the characters |
29107 \begin_inset space \space{}
29111 \begin_inset space \space{}
29115 \begin_inset space \space{}
29119 \begin_inset space \space{}
29123 \begin_inset space \space{}
29126 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29127 a quote character in front of them.
29128 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29129 LatexCommand nomenclature
29130 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29131 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29138 \begin_layout Subsection
29139 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29140 \begin_inset Index idx
29143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29144 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29153 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29154 -code of the symbol
29156 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29158 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29161 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29162 LatexCommand nomenclature
29164 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29171 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29175 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29176 LatexCommand nomenclature
29179 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29184 They will be sorted by
29185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29211 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29214 will be sorted before the
29218 since the character
29219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29226 is considered in sorting.
29229 \begin_layout Standard
29230 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29233 \begin_inset space ~
29238 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29239 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29241 For the example given, you can insert
29245 in this field for the
29246 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29253 will be located before
29254 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29260 \begin_layout Standard
29261 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29266 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29275 \begin_layout Subsection
29276 Nomenclature Options
29277 \begin_inset Index idx
29280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29281 Nomenclature ! Options
29289 \begin_layout Standard
29294 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29295 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29298 \begin_layout Description
29299 refeq Appends the phrase
29300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29315 to every nomenclature entry, where
29321 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29324 \begin_layout Description
29325 refpage Appends the phrase
29326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29341 to every nomenclature entry, where
29347 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29350 \begin_layout Description
29351 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29355 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29356 class options list in the
29358 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29362 In this document the options
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29370 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29376 \begin_layout Standard
29377 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29378 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29383 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29386 \begin_layout Description
29396 \begin_layout Description
29399 nomrefpage Like the
29406 \begin_layout Description
29409 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29418 \begin_layout Description
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29428 \begin_inset space ~
29433 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29436 \begin_layout Standard
29438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29445 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29446 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29450 \begin_layout Standard
29458 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29461 \begin_inset Newline newline
29468 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29473 \begin_inset Newline newline
29477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29492 by their translation.
29495 \begin_layout Subsection
29496 Printing the Nomenclature
29497 \begin_inset Index idx
29500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29501 Nomenclature ! Printing
29509 \begin_layout Standard
29510 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29513 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29529 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29530 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29531 You can choose between these settings:
29534 \begin_layout Description
29535 Default a space of 1
29536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29542 \begin_layout Description
29544 \begin_inset space ~
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29551 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29554 \begin_layout Description
29555 Custom custom space
29558 \begin_layout Standard
29559 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29568 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29576 For example, in order to change the name to
29580 , add the following line to the preamble:
29583 \begin_layout Standard
29591 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29594 \begin_layout Subsection
29595 Nomenclature Program
29596 \begin_inset Index idx
29599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29600 Nomenclature ! Program
29606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29608 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29621 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29622 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29624 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29629 by adding options, see section
29630 \begin_inset space ~
29634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29636 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29641 The available options are listed and explained in
29642 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29644 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29651 \begin_layout Section
29653 \begin_inset Index idx
29656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29663 \begin_inset Index idx
29666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29667 Document ! Branches
29673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29675 name "sec:Branches"
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29683 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29684 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29685 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29686 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29690 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29691 allows you to put text into branches.
29692 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29693 To create a branch, either select the menu
29695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29696 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29699 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29701 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29708 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29709 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29710 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29711 and whether the name of the branch should
29712 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29713 (see below for an example).
29714 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29715 to the name of the other) and to add
29716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29728 \begin_inset space ~
29731 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29732 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29737 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29742 where you can choose a branch.
29743 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29748 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29749 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29753 \begin_inset Branch Question
29756 \begin_layout Standard
29757 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29765 \begin_layout Standard
29766 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29769 \begin_layout Standard
29770 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29789 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29790 Consider for example a file
29791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29798 which has the above branches.
29800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29807 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29831 branch were inactive,
29832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29847 branch was active, likewise
29848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29863 branch was active, and
29864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29867 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29871 if both branches were active.
29872 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29875 \begin_layout Standard
29876 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29882 \begin_layout Standard
29883 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29884 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29885 definitions for each branch.
29886 For example you can define for the question branch
29890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29891 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29892 -syntax, see section
29893 \begin_inset space ~
29897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29899 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29911 \begin_layout Standard
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29931 \begin_layout Standard
29932 and for the answer branch
29935 \begin_layout Standard
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29955 \begin_layout Standard
29956 \begin_inset Branch Question
29959 \begin_layout Standard
29963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30027 \begin_layout Standard
30028 Now it is possible to use the
30032 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30039 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30042 commands to obtain conditional output.
30043 Here is an example formula where only the
30050 \begin_inset Formula
30052 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30061 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30069 \begin_layout Standard
30070 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30076 \begin_inset space \space{}
30079 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30081 For this advanced usage, see the
30087 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30092 \begin_layout Section
30094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30096 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30101 \begin_inset Index idx
30104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30113 \begin_layout Standard
30116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30117 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30120 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30122 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30128 \begin_inset Index idx
30131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30133 -packages ! hyperref
30138 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30139 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30140 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30141 part of the document.
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 The header information in the dialog tab
30150 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30151 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30152 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30153 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30157 \begin_inset space ~
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30166 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30167 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30168 and author entries.
30172 \begin_inset space ~
30176 \begin_inset space ~
30180 \begin_inset space ~
30185 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30188 \begin_layout Standard
30189 You can specify in the dialog tab
30193 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30198 \begin_inset space ~
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30211 option allows long links to be split;
30214 \begin_inset space ~
30218 \begin_inset space ~
30222 \begin_inset space ~
30230 \begin_inset space ~
30235 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30243 colors the different links.
30244 The default colors are:
30247 \begin_layout Labeling
30248 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30253 for hyperlinks and URLs
30256 \begin_layout Labeling
30257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30265 \begin_layout Labeling
30266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30274 \begin_layout Standard
30275 but you can change these in the field
30280 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30283 \begin_layout Standard
30286 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30289 \begin_layout Standard
30294 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30295 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30296 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30299 \begin_layout Standard
30304 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30305 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30306 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30316 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30317 when opening the PDF.
30319 \begin_inset space ~
30322 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30323 \begin_inset space ~
30326 1 will only display the sections.
30329 \begin_layout Standard
30330 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30331 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30337 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30338 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30347 \begin_layout Section
30349 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30353 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30360 \begin_layout Subsection
30363 \begin_inset Index idx
30366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30376 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30383 \begin_layout Standard
30384 As \SpecialChar LyX
30385 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30386 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30387 commands and constructs,
30390 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30391 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30392 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30393 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30394 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30395 cannot support all packages and
30399 \begin_layout Standard
30400 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30401 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30402 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30406 Code box is created by the menu
30408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30410 \begin_inset space ~
30415 or by the toolbar button
30428 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30437 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30439 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30441 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30442 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30449 , you can write the command part
30455 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30456 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30460 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30461 Code box behind the word.
30462 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30463 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30467 \begin_layout Standard
30468 \begin_inset Graphics
30469 filename clipart/ERT.png
30477 \begin_layout Standard
30481 \begin_layout Standard
30482 This is a line with a
30486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30510 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30518 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30519 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30520 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30521 know that the command is finished.
30529 \begin_layout Subsection
30530 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30532 \begin_inset Argument 1
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30536 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30543 \begin_inset Index idx
30546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30556 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30563 \begin_layout Standard
30564 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30565 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30566 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30567 uses in the background.
30568 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30569 is based on commands, you can
30570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30578 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30579 any time if you know the right commands.
30580 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30581 is the end of the day.
30582 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30583 all caption labels bold.
30584 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30586 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30590 \begin_layout Standard
30591 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30593 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30595 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30598 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30607 \begin_layout Standard
30608 As result you find that the package
30613 \begin_inset Index idx
30616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30618 -packages ! caption
30624 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30629 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30633 \begin_inset space ~
30641 \begin_layout Standard
30646 usepackage[options]{package name}
30649 \begin_layout Standard
30650 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30651 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30652 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30653 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 In your case the package name is
30662 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30667 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30668 So you add the command
30671 \begin_layout Standard
30676 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30680 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30685 For more commands provided by the
30689 package, have a look at its documentation,
30690 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30704 \begin_layout Standard
30705 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30707 For example if you use a
30711 class, you don't need the package
30715 , you can instead write
30718 \begin_layout Standard
30723 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30728 \begin_layout Standard
30729 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30730 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30731 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30738 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30741 \begin_layout Standard
30742 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30743 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30745 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30746 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30747 Code box as described in the previous
30751 \begin_layout Standard
30752 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30753 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30758 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30765 \begin_layout Standard
30766 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30772 \begin_layout Standard
30776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30786 \begin_inset Note Note
30789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30790 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30798 \begin_layout Left Header
30799 \begin_inset Argument 1
30802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30822 \begin_inset Note Note
30825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 defines the header line as described below
30834 \begin_layout Center Header
30835 \begin_inset Argument 1
30838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30847 \begin_layout Right Header
30848 \begin_inset Argument 1
30851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30872 \begin_layout Left Footer
30873 \begin_inset Argument 1
30876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 \begin_layout Center Footer
30898 \begin_inset Argument 1
30901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_inset Newline newline
30917 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30923 \begin_layout Right Footer
30924 \begin_inset Argument 1
30927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30949 \begin_layout Section
30950 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30953 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30958 \begin_inset Index idx
30961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30962 Document ! Header/Footer line
30968 \begin_inset Index idx
30971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30980 \begin_layout Standard
30981 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30985 \begin_inset space ~
30996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31002 \begin_inset space ~
31008 As a second step add in the menu
31010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31011 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31018 Custom Header/Footerlines
31019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31023 This module offers the following 6
31024 \begin_inset space ~
31030 \begin_layout Description
31032 \begin_inset space ~
31036 \begin_inset space ~
31040 \begin_inset space ~
31044 \begin_inset space ~
31048 \begin_inset space ~
31054 \begin_layout Description
31056 \begin_inset space ~
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31068 \begin_inset space ~
31072 \begin_inset space ~
31078 \begin_layout Standard
31079 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31082 \begin_layout Standard
31083 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31084 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31086 \begin_inset space ~
31090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31092 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31096 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31099 \begin_layout Standard
31100 \begin_inset Float figure
31106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_inset Tabular
31110 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31111 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31112 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31113 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31114 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31116 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31134 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31163 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31174 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 The normal text on the page goes here.
31179 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31181 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31182 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31187 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31196 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31225 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31254 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31272 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31277 name "fig:Page-layout"
31281 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31303 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31307 \begin_inset space ~
31312 is set to “Default”.
31313 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31322 \begin_layout Subsection
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31327 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31328 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31329 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31330 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31332 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31333 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31338 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31344 \begin_inset space ~
31352 \begin_layout Description
31355 thepage prints the current page number
31358 \begin_layout Description
31361 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31364 \begin_layout Description
31367 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31370 \begin_layout Description
31373 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31374 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31381 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31384 because it usually goes in a left header.
31387 \begin_layout Description
31390 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31391 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31393 It is normally used in the right header.
31396 \begin_layout Subsection
31397 Default header/footer
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31401 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31402 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31403 footer has the page number.
31404 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31405 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31406 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31409 \begin_inset space ~
31417 \begin_layout Subsection
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31422 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31423 Some pages are different.
31424 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31425 a new part or chapter in your book.
31426 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31427 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31428 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31432 Header and footer decoration line
31435 \begin_layout Standard
31436 By default, you get a 0.4
31437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31440 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31441 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31453 in the following way:
31456 \begin_layout Standard
31463 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31476 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31483 \begin_layout Standard
31484 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31486 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31500 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31501 Several header/footer lines
31504 \begin_layout Standard
31505 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31506 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31507 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31509 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31525 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31527 \begin_inset space ~
31535 \begin_layout Standard
31542 headheight}{height}
31545 \begin_layout Standard
31546 where height is a size in standard units.
31547 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31548 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31549 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31550 logfile with the menu
31552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31558 \begin_inset space ~
31563 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31568 \begin_inset Index idx
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31573 -packages ! fancyhdr
31579 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31580 for your header/footer.
31583 \begin_layout Subsection
31587 \begin_layout Standard
31588 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31589 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31590 This example consists of the following definition:
31593 \begin_layout Description
31595 \begin_inset space ~
31604 , empty optional argument
31607 \begin_layout Description
31609 \begin_inset space ~
31612 Header empty, empty optional argument
31615 \begin_layout Description
31617 \begin_inset space ~
31626 in the optional argument
31629 \begin_layout Description
31631 \begin_inset space ~
31640 in the optional argument
31643 \begin_layout Description
31645 \begin_inset space ~
31658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31662 \begin_inset Newline newline
31666 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31673 in the optional argument
31676 \begin_layout Description
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31687 , empty optional argument
31690 \begin_layout Description
31693 headrulewidth set to 2
31694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31701 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31702 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31708 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31717 \begin_layout Standard
31718 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31732 pagestyle{headings}
31738 \begin_inset Note Note
31741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31742 switches back to page style with the default headings
31750 \begin_layout Section
31751 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31754 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31759 \begin_inset Index idx
31762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 \begin_inset Index idx
31772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31781 \begin_layout Standard
31783 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31784 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31785 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31788 \begin_layout Subsection
31792 \begin_layout Standard
31793 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31799 \begin_inset Index idx
31802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31804 -packages ! preview-latex
31809 (on some systems named simply
31814 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31822 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31824 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31832 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31833 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31834 -package are automatically
31835 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31839 \begin_layout Subsection
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31844 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31845 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31847 activate the option
31850 \begin_inset space ~
31857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31863 \begin_inset space ~
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31870 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31877 \begin_inset space ~
31890 \begin_inset space ~
31895 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31898 \begin_layout Standard
31899 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31904 \begin_inset space ~
31912 \begin_inset space ~
31920 \begin_layout Standard
31921 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31922 and when you finish
31926 \begin_layout Standard
31927 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31935 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31936 generated by activating the option
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31945 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31953 \begin_layout Subsection
31954 Selected document parts
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31959 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31960 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31961 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31963 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31969 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31970 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31971 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31974 \begin_layout Standard
31975 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31982 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31994 is explained in section
31996 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32001 \begin_inset space ~
32011 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32012 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32013 the final rotated boxes,
32014 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32015 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32017 Here is the result:
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 \begin_inset Preview
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32032 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32038 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32048 height_special "totalheight"
32053 backgroundcolor "none"
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32081 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32087 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32110 Previewing works also for colors.
32111 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32130 is explained in section
32137 \begin_inset space ~
32150 \begin_layout Standard
32151 \begin_inset Preview
32153 \begin_layout Standard
32157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32176 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32181 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32200 \begin_layout Standard
32201 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32207 \begin_layout Standard
32208 If \SpecialChar LyX
32209 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32210 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32211 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32212 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32213 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32214 the \SpecialChar TeX
32216 If \SpecialChar LyX
32217 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32218 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32220 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32221 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32222 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32225 \begin_layout Subsection
32230 \begin_layout Standard
32231 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32232 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32235 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32237 \begin_inset space ~
32242 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32244 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32246 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32247 's main window, then only this selection
32248 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32249 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32250 the source view window.
32255 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32256 ; but note that if you have
32257 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32259 not just the one which is open at the time.
32262 \begin_layout Section
32263 Advanced Find and Replace
32264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32266 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32271 \begin_inset Index idx
32274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32281 \begin_inset Index idx
32284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32293 \begin_layout Subsection
32297 \begin_layout Standard
32298 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32299 allows for searching of complex,
32300 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32302 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32303 The key-features are:
32306 \begin_layout Itemize
32307 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32308 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32309 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32313 \begin_layout Itemize
32314 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32315 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32316 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32317 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32320 \begin_layout Itemize
32321 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32322 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32323 outside of mathematics environments
32326 \begin_layout Itemize
32327 Search may be widened to a specific
32332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32336 \begin_inset space ~
32339 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32340 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32347 \begin_layout Itemize
32348 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32349 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32354 \begin_inset space ~
32357 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32360 \begin_layout Subsection
32364 \begin_layout Standard
32365 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32367 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32380 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32383 ) or the toolbar button
32386 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32392 Advanced Find and Replace
32397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32407 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32411 \begin_inset space ~
32416 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32419 arg "paragraph-break"
32423 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32424 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32428 arg "paragraph-break"
32431 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32435 searches backwards.
32438 \begin_layout Standard
32442 \begin_inset space ~
32447 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32456 \begin_inset space ~
32461 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32465 Searching for mathematics
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 Mathematical formulas, such as
32470 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32473 or something more complex like
32474 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32477 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32482 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32483 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32484 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32485 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32495 \begin_layout Standard
32496 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32497 This is done by switching to the
32501 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32506 This way, entering in the
32513 \begin_layout Itemize
32514 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32515 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32518 \begin_layout Itemize
32519 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32520 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32523 \begin_layout Itemize
32524 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32525 of it only within section headings.
32526 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32527 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32531 \begin_layout Itemize
32532 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32533 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32540 \begin_layout Standard
32541 The entries made in the
32545 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32548 \begin_inset space ~
32554 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32558 button or alternatively press
32561 arg "paragraph-break"
32568 while the cursor is in the
32571 \begin_inset space ~
32579 \begin_layout Standard
32580 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32582 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32586 \begin_layout Itemize
32587 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32588 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32596 with its typewriter version
32597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32611 \begin_layout Itemize
32612 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32618 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32630 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32637 (you may want to enable the
32640 \begin_inset space ~
32648 \begin_inset space ~
32653 options and disable the
32661 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32669 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32670 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32674 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32677 , or occurrences of
32678 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32682 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32688 \begin_layout Subsection
32692 \begin_layout Standard
32693 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32698 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32700 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32702 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32711 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32717 This is done with the context menu
32719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32720 Insert Regular Expression
32722 while the cursor is in the
32727 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32728 expression matching rules
32732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32733 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32740 \begin_inset space ~
32743 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32744 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32750 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32751 same text in the document.
32752 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32753 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32756 \begin_layout Enumerate
32757 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32762 editor the fraction
32763 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32767 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32770 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32771 fractions with the given denominator.
32774 \begin_layout Enumerate
32775 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32787 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32792 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32793 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32794 Also, by inserting a
32795 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32798 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32799 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32804 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32805 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32808 , and referring back to them through
32809 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32813 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32817 For example, try searching with the regexp
32818 \begin_inset Newline newline
32821 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32824 \begin_inset Newline newline
32827 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32830 \begin_layout Standard
32831 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32843 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32844 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32845 sub-expressions is absolute.
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32851 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32854 always refers to the first occurrence of
32855 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32858 in all entered regexps.
32866 \begin_layout Section
32868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32870 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32875 \begin_inset Index idx
32878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32889 has a built-in spell checker.
32892 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32899 key or the toolbar button
32902 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32905 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32906 beginning of the currently selected text.
32907 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32908 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32909 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32910 scrolled so that it is visible.
32911 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32912 n, if any could be found.
32913 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32917 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32918 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32921 \begin_layout Standard
32922 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32929 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32930 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32932 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32933 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32936 \begin_inset space ~
32944 arg "dialog-show character"
32947 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32949 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32952 \begin_layout Standard
32953 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32954 can be downloaded from here:
32955 \begin_inset Newline newline
32959 \begin_inset Flex URL
32962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32964 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32970 \begin_inset Newline newline
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32977 files for each language.
32978 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32979 \begin_inset space ~
32982 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32983 's installation subfolder
32991 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32993 \begin_inset Newline newline
32996 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32997 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32998 but in most cases these are
33014 is the language code.
33017 \begin_layout Subsection
33021 \begin_layout Standard
33024 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33025 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33027 \begin_inset space ~
33030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33033 you can set the following things:
33036 \begin_layout Description
33038 \begin_inset space ~
33041 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33042 should use for spell checking.
33043 Depending on your platform,
33057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33058 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33059 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33074 \begin_inset space ~
33077 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33080 \begin_layout Description
33082 \begin_inset space ~
33085 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33086 will always use the given language
33087 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33090 \begin_layout Description
33092 \begin_inset space ~
33095 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33101 \begin_inset space \space{}
33105 This should normally not be needed.
33108 \begin_layout Description
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33114 \begin_inset space ~
33117 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33129 \begin_layout Description
33131 \begin_inset space ~
33134 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33135 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33136 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33137 appear in a context menu.
33138 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33142 \begin_layout Description
33144 \begin_inset space ~
33148 \begin_inset space ~
33152 \begin_inset space ~
33155 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33159 \begin_layout Section
33161 \begin_inset Index idx
33164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33173 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33182 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33183 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33195 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33204 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33206 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33207 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33208 which are available for many languages.
33211 \begin_layout Standard
33212 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33213 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33217 \begin_layout Subsection
33218 Setting up the thesaurus
33221 \begin_layout Standard
33230 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33234 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33239 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33245 \begin_inset space ~
33253 For instance, the US English files are named:
33256 \begin_layout Itemize
33260 \begin_layout Itemize
33264 \begin_layout Standard
33273 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33274 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33278 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33279 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33281 \begin_inset space ~
33286 ) to the path where they are installed.
33290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33291 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33292 ies, typical locations are
33298 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33302 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33306 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33309 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33315 LibreOffice-<Version>
33322 On the Mac, the default location is
33324 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33325 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33326 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33327 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33328 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33329 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33337 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33338 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33339 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33343 \begin_layout Standard
33344 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33345 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33349 \begin_layout Itemize
33350 \begin_inset Flex URL
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33355 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33363 \begin_layout Standard
33364 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33365 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33367 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33368 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33369 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33376 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33378 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33379 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33383 \begin_layout Standard
33384 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33386 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33389 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33395 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33398 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33399 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33407 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33408 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33409 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33416 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33419 \begin_layout Subsection
33420 Using the thesaurus
33423 \begin_layout Standard
33424 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33429 or the toolbar button
33432 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33435 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33437 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33439 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33440 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33441 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33450 ), related terms (such as
33453 \begin_inset space ~
33462 ), compounds (such as
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33474 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33483 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33486 \begin_layout Standard
33487 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33488 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33492 \begin_layout Standard
33493 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33494 the dictionary, such as the above
33498 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33503 \begin_inset space \space{}
33506 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33507 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33508 For example, looking up the word form
33512 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33517 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33522 \begin_inset space \space{}
33533 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33534 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33535 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33538 \begin_layout Section
33540 \begin_inset Index idx
33543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 \begin_inset Index idx
33553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 Document ! Change Tracking
33560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33562 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33570 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33571 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33572 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33573 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33577 \begin_inset space ~
33580 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33582 \begin_inset space ~
33590 \begin_layout Standard
33591 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33605 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33606 You can change the color in
33608 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33609 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33611 \begin_inset space ~
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33620 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33626 \begin_inset Index idx
33629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33630 Color ! Change tracking
33635 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33636 's status bar when the
33637 cursor is in changed text.
33638 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33641 arg "changes-merge"
33647 \begin_layout Standard
33648 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33650 \begin_inset Index idx
33653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33662 \begin_layout Standard
33663 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 \begin_inset Graphics
33671 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33687 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33698 \begin_inset Tabular
33699 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33700 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33701 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33702 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33712 arg "changes-track"
33720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33728 \begin_inset space ~
33731 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 arg "changes-output"
33759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33767 \begin_inset space ~
33770 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33776 \begin_inset space ~
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 Jumps to the next change
33816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33825 arg "change-accept"
33833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33841 \begin_inset space ~
33844 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33846 \begin_inset space ~
33855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33864 arg "change-reject"
33872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33880 \begin_inset space ~
33883 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33885 \begin_inset space ~
33894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33903 arg "changes-merge"
33911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33919 \begin_inset space ~
33922 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33924 \begin_inset space ~
33933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 arg "all-changes-accept"
33950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33961 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33963 \begin_inset space ~
33967 \begin_inset space ~
33976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33985 arg "all-changes-reject"
33993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34004 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34043 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34077 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34096 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34102 \begin_layout Standard
34103 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34123 \begin_layout Standard
34124 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34125 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34126 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34127 the next change after the current cursor position.
34128 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34129 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34130 step to the next change.
34131 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34136 to describe a change.
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34140 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34146 \begin_inset Index idx
34149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34151 -packages ! dvipost
34157 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34165 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34169 \begin_layout Section
34170 Comparison of Documents
34171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34173 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34178 \begin_inset Index idx
34181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34182 Comparison of documents
34190 \begin_layout Standard
34191 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34194 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34198 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34199 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34201 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34203 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34207 \begin_inset space ~
34211 \begin_inset space ~
34215 \begin_inset space ~
34224 \begin_inset space ~
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34232 \begin_inset space ~
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34240 \begin_inset space ~
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34249 enables the change tracking option
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34256 \begin_inset space ~
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34265 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34268 \begin_layout Section
34269 International Support
34270 \begin_inset Index idx
34273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34274 International support
34282 \begin_layout Standard
34283 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34284 with any language you want.
34285 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34286 up \SpecialChar LyX
34288 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34290 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34298 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34299 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34300 \begin_inset space ~
34304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34306 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34313 \begin_layout Subsection
34315 \begin_inset Index idx
34318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34325 \begin_inset Index idx
34328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34329 Document ! Settings
34335 \begin_inset Index idx
34338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34339 Document ! Language
34347 \begin_layout Standard
34350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34354 dialog lets you set
34356 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34361 \begin_layout Standard
34366 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34371 \begin_inset space ~
34376 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34377 For details about the different encoding options see section
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34384 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34392 Keyboard mapping configuration
34393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34395 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34403 If you have for example a U.
34404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34407 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34408 can use an alternate keymap.
34409 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34415 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34416 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34419 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34420 \begin_inset space ~
34424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34426 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34431 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34432 which one you want to use.
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34436 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34437 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34438 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34442 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34443 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34444 one to support the characters you want.
34445 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34452 \begin_layout Chapter
34455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34457 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34464 \begin_layout Standard
34465 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34466 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34467 topic inside the user's guide.
34470 \begin_layout Section
34472 \begin_inset Index idx
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34489 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34492 \begin_layout Subsection
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 Creates a new document.
34500 \begin_layout Subsection
34504 \begin_layout Standard
34505 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34506 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34507 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34510 \begin_layout Subsection
34514 \begin_layout Standard
34518 \begin_layout Subsection
34522 \begin_layout Standard
34523 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34524 Click there on a file to open it.
34527 \begin_layout Subsection
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34532 Closes the current document.
34535 \begin_layout Subsection
34539 \begin_layout Standard
34540 Closes all opened documents.
34543 \begin_layout Subsection
34547 \begin_layout Standard
34548 Saves the actual document.
34551 \begin_layout Subsection
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34556 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34559 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 Saves all opened documents.
34567 \begin_layout Subsection
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34572 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34575 \begin_layout Subsection
34579 \begin_layout Standard
34580 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34581 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34582 It is described in the section
34584 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34589 Additional Features
34594 \begin_layout Subsection
34598 \begin_layout Standard
34599 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34600 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34602 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34603 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34607 \begin_layout Standard
34608 When using the menu entry
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34616 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34620 \begin_inset space ~
34624 \begin_inset space ~
34628 \begin_inset space ~
34633 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34634 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34637 \begin_layout Subsection
34639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34641 name "subsec:Export"
34648 \begin_layout Standard
34649 You can export your document to various file formats.
34650 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34652 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34653 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34654 during its configuration.
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34658 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34666 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34673 \begin_layout Description
34679 \begin_inset space ~
34682 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34687 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34688 \begin_inset Newline newline
34691 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34692 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34696 \begin_layout Description
34697 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34703 \begin_layout Description
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34708 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34714 \begin_layout Description
34715 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34716 's native DVI-format.
34717 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34718 files paths or file names in your document.
34720 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34727 \begin_layout Description
34728 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34729 in files paths or file names
34732 \begin_layout Description
34734 \begin_inset space ~
34741 ) DVI-format using the program
34743 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34746 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34758 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34766 \begin_layout Description
34768 \begin_inset space ~
34771 (cropped) the same as
34775 but with cropped page margins.
34778 \begin_layout Description
34780 \begin_inset space ~
34783 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34787 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34792 \begin_layout Description
34796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34804 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34812 \begin_layout Description
34814 \begin_inset space ~
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34821 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34825 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34833 \begin_layout Description
34837 \begin_inset space ~
34846 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34847 source that is compilable with the program
34849 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34853 \begin_layout Description
34857 \begin_inset space ~
34862 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34863 source, additionally all images used in the document
34864 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34868 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34871 \begin_layout Description
34875 \begin_inset space ~
34880 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34881 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34882 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34890 \begin_layout Description
34894 \begin_inset space ~
34903 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34904 source that is compilable with the program
34910 \begin_layout Description
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34923 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34924 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34930 \begin_layout Description
34932 \begin_inset space ~
34935 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34936 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34942 \begin_inset space \space{}
34947 \begin_inset space ~
34951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34966 represent the version number)
34969 \begin_layout Description
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34975 \begin_inset space ~
34978 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34979 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34980 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34984 \begin_layout Description
34985 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34986 's internal XHTML engine
34989 \begin_layout Description
34991 \begin_inset space ~
34995 \begin_inset space ~
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35006 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35011 For the conversion the program
35020 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35023 \begin_layout Description
35024 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35029 \begin_layout Description
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35034 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35036 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35039 For the conversion the program
35048 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35051 \begin_layout Description
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35056 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35057 For the conversion the program
35066 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35069 \begin_layout Description
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35074 (cropped) the same as
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35082 but with cropped page margins
35085 \begin_layout Description
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35094 PDF-format using the program
35098 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35101 \begin_layout Description
35105 \begin_inset space ~
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35117 \begin_inset space ~
35122 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35127 \begin_inset space \space{}
35130 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35134 \begin_layout Description
35138 \begin_inset space ~
35143 PDF-format using the program
35145 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35148 , produces PDF-files directly
35151 \begin_layout Description
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35160 PDF-format using the program
35164 , produces PDF-files directly
35167 \begin_layout Description
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35176 PDF-format using the program
35180 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35183 \begin_layout Description
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35192 PDF-format using the program
35197 , produces PDF-files directly
35200 \begin_layout Description
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35212 \begin_layout Description
35216 \begin_inset space ~
35220 \begin_inset space ~
35225 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35226 and then exported as text using the program
35231 \begin_layout Description
35236 PostScript format using the program
35241 \begin_layout Description
35242 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35243 source and also code in the statistical programming
35257 it is possible to use
35261 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 If one of the menu entries
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35282 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35284 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35292 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35297 \begin_inset Index idx
35300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35310 \begin_layout Subsection
35314 \begin_layout Standard
35315 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35316 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35319 \begin_inset space ~
35323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35325 reference "sec:Paths"
35330 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35339 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35340 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35341 's preferences as described in section
35342 \begin_inset space ~
35346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35348 reference "subsec:Converters"
35355 \begin_layout Subsection
35356 New and Close Window
35359 \begin_layout Standard
35360 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35364 \begin_layout Subsection
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35372 \begin_layout Section
35374 \begin_inset Index idx
35377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35386 \begin_layout Subsection
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 Described in section
35392 \begin_inset space ~
35396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35398 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35405 \begin_layout Subsection
35406 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35409 \begin_layout Standard
35410 Described in section
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35417 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35424 \begin_layout Subsection
35428 \begin_layout Standard
35429 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35430 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35433 \begin_layout Subsection
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 Selects the whole document.
35441 \begin_layout Subsection
35442 Find & Replace (Quick)
35445 \begin_layout Standard
35446 Described in section
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35453 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35460 \begin_layout Subsection
35461 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35464 \begin_layout Standard
35465 Described in section
35466 \begin_inset space ~
35470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35472 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35479 \begin_layout Subsection
35480 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35483 \begin_layout Standard
35484 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35488 \begin_layout Subsection
35492 \begin_layout Standard
35493 Described in section
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35500 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35507 \begin_layout Subsection
35509 \begin_inset Index idx
35512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35513 Paragraph ! Settings
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35522 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35523 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35527 \begin_layout Standard
35528 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35529 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_layout Subsection
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35552 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35553 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35557 \begin_layout Standard
35558 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35560 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35561 The properties of tables are described in section
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35568 reference "sec:Tables"
35572 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35573 \begin_inset space ~
35577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35579 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35586 \begin_layout Subsection
35587 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35590 \begin_layout Standard
35591 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35593 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35594 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35600 reference "sec:Nesting"
35605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35607 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35614 \begin_layout Subsection
35617 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35622 nts of the same type.
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35630 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35634 for an explanation.
35637 \begin_layout Section
35639 \begin_inset Index idx
35642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 At the bottom of the
35656 menu the opened documents are listed.
35659 \begin_layout Subsection
35660 Open/Close all Insets
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35667 \begin_layout Subsection
35668 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35671 \begin_layout Standard
35672 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 Math macros are described in the
35683 \begin_layout Subsection
35687 \begin_layout Standard
35688 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35695 reference "sec:Navigating"
35700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35702 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35709 \begin_layout Subsection
35713 \begin_layout Standard
35714 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35716 \begin_inset space ~
35720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35722 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35729 \begin_layout Subsection
35733 \begin_layout Standard
35734 Opens a window showing console messages.
35735 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35740 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35741 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35742 is processing the document.
35745 \begin_layout Subsection
35747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35749 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35754 \begin_inset Index idx
35757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35768 All toolbars and the
35771 \begin_inset space ~
35776 can be turned on and off.
35781 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35793 \begin_inset space ~
35805 \begin_inset space ~
35810 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35814 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35821 \begin_layout Standard
35826 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35830 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35831 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35832 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35833 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35834 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35837 \begin_layout Standard
35839 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35840 \begin_inset space ~
35844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35846 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35853 \begin_layout Subsection
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset space ~
35886 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35887 's main window vertically while
35890 \begin_inset space ~
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35910 \begin_inset space ~
35915 will split it horizontally.
35916 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35917 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35918 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35919 three or more documents at the same time.
35920 To close a split view, use the menu
35923 \begin_inset space ~
35927 \begin_inset space ~
35935 \begin_layout Subsection
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35940 Closes a split view.
35943 \begin_layout Subsection
35947 \begin_layout Standard
35948 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35949 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35950 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35951 's main window fullscreen.
35952 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35953 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35956 \begin_layout Section
35958 \begin_inset Index idx
35961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35970 \begin_layout Subsection
35974 \begin_layout Standard
35975 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35982 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35993 \begin_layout Subsection
35995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35997 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36004 \begin_layout Standard
36005 Here you can insert the following characters:
36008 \begin_layout Description
36013 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36016 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36017 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36018 -packages you have installed.
36019 You can get a complete display by checking
36022 \begin_inset space ~
36028 \begin_inset Newline newline
36032 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36040 Not all characters will be visible in the
36044 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36052 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36056 ) can display every character.
36064 \begin_layout Description
36065 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36069 \begin_layout Description
36071 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_inset space ~
36078 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36079 \begin_inset space ~
36083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36085 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36092 \begin_layout Description
36094 \begin_inset space ~
36097 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36101 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36107 \begin_layout Description
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36112 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36116 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36122 \begin_layout Description
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36127 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36131 \begin_layout Description
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36136 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36140 \begin_layout Description
36142 \begin_inset space ~
36145 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36151 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36157 \begin_layout Description
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36162 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36166 \begin_layout Description
36168 \begin_inset space ~
36172 \begin_inset Index idx
36175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36182 \begin_inset Index idx
36185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36186 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36191 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36192 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36194 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36200 \begin_inset Index idx
36203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36211 \begin_inset Newline newline
36214 More information about this feature can be found in the
36220 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36226 \begin_layout Description
36227 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36229 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36230 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36234 \begin_layout Subsection
36238 \begin_layout Standard
36239 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36242 \begin_layout Description
36243 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36244 \begin_inset script superscript
36246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36255 \begin_layout Description
36256 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36257 \begin_inset script subscript
36259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 \begin_layout Description
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36273 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36280 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36287 \begin_layout Description
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36292 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36293 \begin_inset space ~
36297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36299 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36306 \begin_layout Description
36308 \begin_inset space ~
36311 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36318 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36325 \begin_layout Description
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36330 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36336 \begin_inset space \space{}
36339 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36340 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36349 To insert a fraction use the command
36354 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36358 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36367 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36374 \begin_layout Description
36376 \begin_inset space ~
36379 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36386 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36393 \begin_layout Description
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36398 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36405 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36412 \begin_layout Description
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36417 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36424 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36431 \begin_layout Description
36432 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36433 \begin_inset space ~
36437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36439 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36446 \begin_layout Description
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36451 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36458 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36465 \begin_layout Description
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36470 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36477 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36484 \begin_layout Description
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36493 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36494 \begin_inset space ~
36498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36500 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36507 \begin_layout Description
36509 \begin_inset space ~
36512 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36513 as described in section
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36520 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36527 \begin_layout Description
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36532 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36539 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36546 \begin_layout Description
36548 \begin_inset space ~
36551 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36552 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36554 \begin_inset space ~
36558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36560 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36567 \begin_layout Description
36569 \begin_inset space ~
36572 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36573 \begin_inset space ~
36577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36579 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36586 \begin_layout Description
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36595 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36596 \begin_inset space ~
36600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36602 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36609 \begin_layout Subsection
36613 \begin_layout Standard
36614 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36639 are described in section
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36646 reference "sec:toc"
36655 is described in section
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36662 reference "sec:Index"
36670 is described in section
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36677 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36683 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36686 is described in section
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36693 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36700 \begin_layout Subsection
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36705 To insert floats, as described in section
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36712 reference "sec:Floats"
36716 and in detail the chapter
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36731 \begin_layout Subsection
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36736 To insert notes, described in section
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36743 reference "sec:Notes"
36750 \begin_layout Subsection
36754 \begin_layout Standard
36755 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36757 Branches are described in section
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36764 reference "sec:Branches"
36771 \begin_layout Subsection
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36777 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36779 An example is the document class
36780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36787 with three custom insets.
36790 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36794 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36800 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36803 \begin_layout Subsection
36805 \begin_inset Index idx
36808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36818 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36820 For more information see chapter
36822 External Document Parts
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36831 \begin_layout Subsection
36833 \begin_inset Index idx
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36847 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36854 \begin_inset space ~
36862 \begin_layout Subsection
36866 \begin_layout Standard
36871 dialog as described in section
36872 \begin_inset space ~
36876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36878 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36885 \begin_layout Subsection
36889 \begin_layout Standard
36894 as described in section
36895 \begin_inset space ~
36899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36901 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36908 \begin_layout Subsection
36912 \begin_layout Standard
36917 as described in section
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36924 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36931 \begin_layout Subsection
36933 \begin_inset Index idx
36936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36943 \begin_inset Index idx
36946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36947 Longtables ! Caption
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36957 Floats are described in section
36958 \begin_inset space ~
36962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36964 reference "sec:Floats"
36968 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36983 \begin_layout Subsection
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36988 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36995 reference "sec:Index"
37002 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37007 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37008 \begin_inset space ~
37012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37014 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37021 \begin_layout Subsection
37025 \begin_layout Standard
37026 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37027 Tables are described in section
37028 \begin_inset space ~
37032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37034 reference "sec:Tables"
37038 and in detail in the chapter
37045 \begin_inset space ~
37053 \begin_layout Subsection
37057 \begin_layout Standard
37063 Graphics are described in section
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37070 reference "sec:Graphics"
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 Inserts a URL as described in section
37083 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37089 reference "subsec:URLs"
37096 \begin_layout Subsection
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37101 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37108 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37115 \begin_layout Subsection
37119 \begin_layout Standard
37120 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37127 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37134 \begin_layout Subsection
37138 \begin_layout Standard
37139 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37146 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37153 \begin_layout Subsection
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37159 title or caption of a float.
37160 Inserts a short title as described in section
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37167 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37174 \begin_layout Subsection
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37180 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37181 Code box as described in section
37182 \begin_inset space ~
37186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37188 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37195 \begin_layout Subsection
37197 \begin_inset Index idx
37200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37209 \begin_layout Standard
37210 Inserts a program listings box.
37211 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37213 Program Code Listings
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37226 \begin_layout Subsection
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 Inserts the actual date.
37232 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37236 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37244 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_layout Subsection
37256 \begin_layout Standard
37257 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37264 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37271 \begin_layout Section
37273 \begin_inset Index idx
37276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37285 \begin_layout Standard
37286 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37287 \begin_inset space ~
37290 of the current document.
37291 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37294 \begin_layout Subsection
37298 \begin_layout Standard
37299 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37300 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37301 to jump, for example, between section
37302 \begin_inset space ~
37306 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37310 2.5 and use the submenu
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37334 \begin_inset space ~
37340 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37344 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37350 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37353 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37356 \begin_layout Standard
37357 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37366 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37374 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37377 \begin_layout Subsection
37378 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37386 \begin_layout Subsection
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37392 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37393 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37409 \begin_layout Subsection
37413 \begin_layout Standard
37414 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37417 The \SpecialChar LyX
37418 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37433 manual for a detailed description.
37436 \begin_layout Section
37438 \begin_inset Index idx
37441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37450 \begin_layout Subsection
37454 \begin_layout Standard
37455 Change Tracking is described in section
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37462 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37469 \begin_layout Subsection
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37479 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37480 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37482 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37483 to the clipboard or update the view.
37484 \begin_inset Newline newline
37487 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37491 \begin_layout Standard
37494 Open Containing Directory
37496 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37497 's temporary folder for the document.
37498 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37499 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37500 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37501 For example some journals require to send the
37505 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37509 \begin_layout Subsection
37510 Start Appendix Here
37513 \begin_layout Standard
37514 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37515 as described in section
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37522 reference "sec:Appendices"
37529 \begin_layout Subsection
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37537 \begin_layout Standard
37538 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37539 default output format for the document (menu
37541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37543 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37555 \begin_inset space ~
37559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37561 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37565 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37568 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37569 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37574 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37579 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37581 \begin_inset space ~
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37597 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37601 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37602 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37604 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37605 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37610 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37612 \begin_inset space ~
37615 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37625 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37630 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37631 when it is first configured.
37632 The default output format is
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_layout Subsection
37644 View (Other Formats)
37647 \begin_layout Standard
37648 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37649 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37650 actual document with an external program.
37651 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37652 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37653 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37655 All possible formats are listed in section
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37662 reference "subsec:Export"
37667 You should at least see the menu entry
37672 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37674 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37682 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37687 \begin_inset Index idx
37690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37691 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37702 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37705 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37710 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37715 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37725 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37730 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37731 when it is first configured.
37734 \begin_layout Subsection
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37742 \begin_layout Standard
37743 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37744 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37747 \begin_layout Subsection
37748 Update (Other Formats)
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37752 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37753 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37756 \begin_layout Subsection
37757 View Master Document
37760 \begin_layout Standard
37761 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37777 \begin_inset space ~
37782 manual for more information on this topic).
37783 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37784 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37788 \begin_inset space ~
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37797 generates the output of the whole book, while
37801 will just output the chapter alone.
37804 \begin_layout Standard
37805 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37806 in the document settings (menu
37808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37809 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37810 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37812 \begin_inset space ~
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37822 \begin_inset space ~
37826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37828 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37832 ) or in the preferences (menu
37834 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37835 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37837 \begin_inset space ~
37840 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37845 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37851 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \begin_inset space ~
37861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37863 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37870 \begin_layout Subsection
37871 Update Master Document
37874 \begin_layout Standard
37875 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37896 manual for more information on this topic).
37897 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37898 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37901 \begin_layout Standard
37902 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37903 in the document settings (menu
37905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37907 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37913 \begin_inset space ~
37919 \begin_inset space ~
37923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37925 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37929 ) or in the preferences (menu
37931 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37937 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37939 \begin_inset space ~
37942 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37944 \begin_inset space ~
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37960 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37967 \begin_layout Subsection
37969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37971 name "subsec:Compressed"
37978 \begin_layout Standard
37979 Un/compresses the current document.
37980 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37981 compression (see the
37983 Additional Features
37985 manual for details).
37988 \begin_layout Subsection
37992 \begin_layout Standard
37993 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
37996 \begin_layout Subsection
38000 \begin_layout Standard
38001 The document settings are described in appendix
38002 \begin_inset space ~
38006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38008 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38015 \begin_layout Section
38017 \begin_inset Index idx
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38029 \begin_layout Subsection
38033 \begin_layout Standard
38034 Spell checking is explained in section
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38041 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38048 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 The thesaurus is described in section
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38060 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38067 \begin_layout Subsection
38069 \begin_inset Index idx
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 \begin_inset Index idx
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38091 \begin_layout Standard
38092 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38093 the highlighted document part.
38096 \begin_layout Subsection
38102 \begin_inset Index idx
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38106 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38116 Generates with the help of the program
38118 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38121 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38122 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38123 This feature is not available on Windows.
38126 \begin_layout Subsection
38132 \begin_inset Index idx
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38156 to see the full filename paths.
38159 \begin_layout Subsection
38161 \begin_inset Index idx
38164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38174 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38175 files as described in section
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38182 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38189 \begin_layout Subsection
38191 \begin_inset Index idx
38194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38207 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38225 \begin_inset Index idx
38228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38229 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38238 \begin_layout Standard
38239 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38240 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38241 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38242 -packages and programs it needs; see
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38250 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38257 \begin_layout Subsection
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38266 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38273 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38280 \begin_layout Section
38282 \begin_inset Index idx
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38295 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38296 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38298 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38302 \begin_layout Standard
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38311 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38312 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38313 packages and classes found
38314 by \SpecialChar LyX
38316 \begin_inset space ~
38320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38322 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38329 \begin_layout Standard
38333 \begin_inset space ~
38338 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38343 \begin_layout Section
38345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38347 name "sec:Toolbars"
38354 \begin_layout Standard
38355 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38362 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38369 \begin_layout Standard
38370 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38371 This is described in the
38373 Additional Features
38378 \begin_layout Subsection
38380 \begin_inset Index idx
38383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38392 \begin_layout Standard
38393 \begin_inset Graphics
38394 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38403 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38409 \begin_layout Standard
38410 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 \begin_inset Note Note
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38436 manual for more information.
38444 \begin_layout Standard
38445 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38451 \begin_layout Standard
38452 \begin_inset Tabular
38453 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38454 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38455 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38456 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38462 \begin_inset Graphics
38463 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 pull-down box for the environments
38490 \begin_layout Standard
38491 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38497 \begin_layout Standard
38499 \begin_inset Tabular
38500 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38501 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38502 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38503 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38527 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38564 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38587 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38603 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38633 arg "spelling-continuously"
38641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38645 Spellcheck continuously
38651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38794 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38810 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38824 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38850 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38892 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38906 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38907 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 Emphasize text, function of the
38937 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38939 \begin_inset space ~
38942 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 Set text to noun style, function of the
38974 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38979 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38997 arg "textstyle-apply"
39005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 Format text using the current settings in the
39011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39013 \begin_inset space ~
39016 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39049 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39069 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39097 arg "tabular-insert"
39105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39127 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 Toggle outline window on/off,
39141 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39148 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39169 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39196 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39209 \begin_layout Subsection
39211 \begin_inset Index idx
39214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 \begin_layout Standard
39224 \begin_inset Graphics
39225 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39233 \begin_layout Standard
39234 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39240 \begin_layout Standard
39241 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39245 \begin_layout Standard
39246 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39252 \begin_layout Standard
39253 \begin_inset Tabular
39254 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39255 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39256 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39257 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39294 arg "layout Enumerate"
39302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 arg "layout Itemize"
39329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39375 arg "layout Description"
39383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 arg "depth-increment"
39410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 arg "depth-decrement"
39448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39456 \begin_inset space ~
39460 \begin_inset space ~
39469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 arg "float-insert figure"
39486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39492 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39493 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39509 arg "float-insert table"
39517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39524 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39570 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39600 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 arg "nomencl-insert"
39672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39698 arg "footnote-insert"
39706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39728 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39744 \begin_inset space ~
39753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39777 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39797 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39906 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39922 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39937 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 arg "dialog-show character"
39965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39976 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39992 arg "layout-paragraph"
40000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40026 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40040 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40054 \begin_layout Subsection
40055 View/Update Toolbar
40056 \begin_inset Index idx
40059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 Toolbar ! View / Update
40068 \begin_layout Standard
40069 \begin_inset Graphics
40070 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40077 \begin_layout Standard
40078 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40084 \begin_layout Standard
40085 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40096 \begin_layout Standard
40097 \begin_inset Tabular
40098 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40099 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40100 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40101 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40141 arg "buffer-update"
40149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40171 arg "master-buffer-view"
40179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40205 arg "master-buffer-update"
40213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40243 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40258 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40259 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40260 Synchronize with Output
40266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40290 View (Other Formats)
40296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40303 arg "update-others"
40311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40318 Update (Other Formats)
40331 \begin_layout Standard
40332 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40336 \begin_layout Subsection
40340 \begin_layout Standard
40341 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40348 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40352 , the table toolbar
40353 \begin_inset Index idx
40356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40365 \begin_inset space ~
40370 manual and the math macro toolbar
40371 \begin_inset Index idx
40374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40387 \begin_layout Chapter
40388 The Document Settings
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40391 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40396 \begin_inset Index idx
40399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40400 Document ! Settings
40408 \begin_layout Standard
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40417 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40418 is called with the menu
40420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40424 You can save your document settings as default with the
40426 Save as Document Defaults
40428 button in any dialog.
40429 This will create a template named
40433 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40434 when you create a new document without
40438 \begin_layout Standard
40443 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40444 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40447 \begin_layout Standard
40448 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40449 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40450 to find the one you are looking for.
40451 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40452 the submenus of the dialog.
40454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40458 \begin_inset space \space{}
40462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40469 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40470 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40471 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40474 \begin_layout Section
40478 \begin_layout Standard
40479 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40481 Document classes are described in section
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40488 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40496 \begin_layout Standard
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40505 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40510 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40511 as a layout for a document class.
40512 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40514 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40523 \begin_layout Standard
40524 Some classes use special class options by default.
40525 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40529 and you can decide to use them or not.
40530 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40531 recommended you leave them untouched.
40536 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40537 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40542 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40544 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40550 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40551 \begin_inset Newline newline
40556 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40559 \begin_inset Newline newline
40562 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40563 distribution, see section
40568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40570 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40582 \begin_layout Standard
40587 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40588 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40589 in the background if the child document
40590 is opened without its master.
40591 This way child documents are always compilable.
40592 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40607 \begin_layout Standard
40608 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40619 \begin_inset Index idx
40622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40624 -packages ! prettyref
40630 \begin_inset Index idx
40633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40635 -packages ! refstyle
40640 for cross-references, see section
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40647 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40654 \begin_layout Section
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40659 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40660 Please refer to the section
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40676 manual for details.
40679 \begin_layout Section
40683 \begin_layout Standard
40684 Modules are explained in section
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40691 reference "subsec:Modules"
40698 \begin_layout Section
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40710 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40717 \begin_layout Section
40721 \begin_layout Standard
40722 The document font settings are described in section
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40729 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40736 \begin_layout Section
40740 \begin_layout Standard
40741 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40758 and whether it should be a
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40766 can also be specified here.
40769 \begin_layout Standard
40770 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40771 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40772 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40774 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40777 \begin_layout Standard
40780 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40783 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40784 justifies the text on screen.
40785 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40789 \begin_layout Section
40793 \begin_layout Standard
40794 This dialog is described in sections
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40801 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40808 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40815 \begin_layout Section
40819 \begin_layout Standard
40820 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40827 reference "subsec:Margins"
40834 \begin_layout Section
40836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40838 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40843 \begin_inset Index idx
40846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40847 Language ! Encoding
40855 \begin_layout Standard
40856 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40857 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40858 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40860 is always encoded in utf8).
40861 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40862 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40863 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40864 -command is not known for
40865 a particular character).
40868 \begin_layout Standard
40869 If you use the option
40874 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40875 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40876 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40878 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40879 exactly one encoding.
40880 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40883 \begin_layout Standard
40885 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40886 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40887 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40888 installation supports Unicode), choose
40889 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40890 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40891 is quite incomplete, so
40892 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40897 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40898 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40899 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40900 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40901 -commands is not used, because all
40902 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40903 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40904 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40905 , two new alternative engines
40906 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40908 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40910 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40941 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40946 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40950 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40953 \begin_layout Standard
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40962 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40963 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40973 The possible settings are:
40976 \begin_layout Description
40977 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40979 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40980 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40990 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40997 \begin_layout Description
40998 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40999 format you will use.
41000 In many cases this will be
41005 \begin_inset Index idx
41008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41016 If the newer package
41021 \begin_inset Index idx
41024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41026 -packages ! polyglossia
41031 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41032 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41033 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41035 this package will be used instead of
41042 \begin_layout Description
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41055 would be more appropriate.
41058 \begin_layout Description
41059 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41060 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41064 (for German texts), type in
41067 \begin_inset Newline newline
41072 usepackage{ngerman}
41075 \begin_layout Description
41076 None will not use a language package.
41077 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41080 \begin_layout Standard
41081 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41084 \begin_layout Description
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41090 \begin_inset space ~
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41101 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41107 \begin_inset Index idx
41110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 -packages ! inputenc
41118 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41119 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41120 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41124 \begin_layout Description
41125 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41127 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41128 commands, which may result in a big
41129 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41130 -commands are needed.
41133 \begin_layout Description
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41142 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41145 \begin_layout Description
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41154 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41157 \begin_layout Description
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41162 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41165 \begin_layout Description
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41174 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41175 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41178 \begin_layout Description
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41184 \begin_inset space ~
41187 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41191 \begin_layout Description
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41200 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41201 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41204 \begin_layout Description
41206 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41214 \begin_inset space ~
41217 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41224 \begin_layout Description
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41237 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41238 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41241 \begin_layout Description
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41250 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41251 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41252 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41253 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41264 \begin_layout Description
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41273 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41274 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41275 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41277 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41288 \begin_layout Description
41290 \begin_inset space ~
41294 \begin_inset space ~
41297 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41300 \begin_layout Description
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41309 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41312 \begin_layout Description
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41318 \begin_inset space ~
41321 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41324 \begin_layout Description
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41329 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41332 \begin_layout Description
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41337 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41340 \begin_layout Description
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41349 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41352 \begin_layout Description
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41364 \begin_layout Description
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41373 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41376 \begin_layout Description
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_layout Description
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41397 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41403 \begin_inset Index idx
41406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 , when using this, set the document language to
41418 \begin_layout Description
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41427 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41432 , when using this, set the document language to
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41441 \begin_layout Description
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset space ~
41450 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41456 \begin_inset Index idx
41459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41461 -packages ! japanese
41466 , when using this, set the document language to
41471 \begin_layout Description
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41480 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41485 , when using this, set the document language to
41490 \begin_layout Description
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41499 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41504 , when using this, set the document language to
41509 \begin_layout Description
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41514 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41517 \begin_layout Description
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41530 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41533 \begin_layout Description
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41546 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41547 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41548 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41551 \begin_layout Description
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_layout Description
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41572 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41573 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41576 \begin_layout Description
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41585 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41591 \begin_inset Index idx
41594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41601 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41604 \begin_layout Description
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41617 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41624 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41627 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41634 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41635 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41637 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41640 \begin_layout Description
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41646 \begin_inset space ~
41649 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41655 \begin_inset Index idx
41658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41665 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41668 \begin_layout Description
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41673 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41679 \begin_inset Index idx
41682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41684 -packages ! inputenc
41690 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41694 \begin_layout Description
41696 \begin_inset space ~
41700 \begin_inset space ~
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41707 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41714 \begin_layout Description
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41727 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41728 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41729 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41733 \begin_layout Description
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41739 \begin_inset space ~
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41746 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41747 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41750 \begin_layout Section
41752 \begin_inset Index idx
41755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41762 \begin_inset Index idx
41765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41772 \begin_inset Index idx
41775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41776 Color ! Shaded boxes
41782 \begin_inset Index idx
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41786 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41794 \begin_layout Standard
41795 Here you can alter the font color for the
41799 (default: black), for
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41807 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41811 (default: white) and for
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41824 sets the color back to the default.
41827 \begin_layout Standard
41828 Clicking any button showing
41836 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41837 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41838 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41839 later more quickly.
41842 \begin_layout Standard
41843 Note, if you change the
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41851 font color and use the option
41854 \begin_inset space ~
41859 in the document settings under
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41867 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41874 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41881 \begin_layout Standard
41882 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41901 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41904 \begin_inset space ~
41907 Code after a forced page break:
41910 \begin_layout Itemize
41911 For the page color:
41912 \begin_inset Newline newline
41919 pagecolor{color name}
41922 \begin_layout Itemize
41923 For the text color:
41924 \begin_inset Newline newline
41934 \begin_layout Standard
41935 You are restricted to one of
41971 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41978 \begin_inset space ~
41984 \begin_inset Newline newline
41987 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41988 names to refer to them:
41991 \begin_layout Itemize
41997 \begin_inset Newline newline
42002 page_backgroundcolor
42005 \begin_layout Itemize
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42015 \begin_inset Newline newline
42023 \begin_layout Itemize
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42033 \begin_inset Newline newline
42041 \begin_layout Itemize
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42051 \begin_inset Newline newline
42059 \begin_layout Standard
42060 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42063 \begin_inset space ~
42071 \begin_inset space ~
42079 \begin_layout Section
42083 \begin_layout Standard
42084 Here you can adjust the
42088 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42092 as described in section
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42099 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42106 \begin_layout Section
42110 \begin_layout Standard
42111 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42117 \begin_inset Index idx
42120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 \begin_inset Index idx
42135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42137 -packages ! jurabib
42145 Sectioned bibliography
42147 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42153 \begin_inset Index idx
42156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42158 -packages ! bibtopic
42163 and you can select a
42167 for the generation of the bibliography.
42168 For a further description see section
42169 \begin_inset space ~
42173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42175 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42182 \begin_layout Section
42186 \begin_layout Standard
42187 Here you can define the
42191 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42199 reference "sec:Index"
42206 \begin_layout Section
42210 \begin_layout Standard
42211 The PDF properties are explained in section
42212 \begin_inset space ~
42216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42218 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42225 \begin_layout Section
42229 \begin_layout Standard
42230 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42231 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42237 \begin_inset Index idx
42240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42242 -packages ! amsmath
42252 \begin_inset Index idx
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42257 -packages ! amssymb
42267 \begin_inset Index idx
42270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42282 \begin_inset Index idx
42285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42297 \begin_inset Index idx
42300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42302 -packages ! mathdots
42312 \begin_inset Index idx
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42317 -packages ! mathtools
42327 \begin_inset Index idx
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 \begin_inset Index idx
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42347 -packages ! stackrel
42357 \begin_inset Index idx
42360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42362 -packages ! stmaryrd
42372 \begin_inset Index idx
42375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42377 -packages ! undertilde
42382 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42385 \begin_layout Description
42386 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42387 -errors in formulas,
42388 ensure that you have this enabled.
42391 \begin_layout Description
42392 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42393 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42394 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42398 \begin_layout Description
42399 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_layout Description
42415 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42430 \begin_layout Description
42431 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42442 \begin_layout Description
42443 mathtools is used for the math commands
42479 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42486 \begin_layout Description
42487 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42489 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42498 \begin_layout Description
42499 stackrel is used for the math command
42516 \begin_layout Description
42517 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42520 \begin_layout Description
42521 undertilde is used for the math command
42529 Accents for one Character
42538 \begin_layout Section
42542 \begin_layout Standard
42543 The float placement options are described in the section
42546 \begin_inset space ~
42554 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_layout Section
42566 \begin_layout Standard
42567 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42569 Program Code Listings
42574 \begin_inset space ~
42582 \begin_layout Section
42586 \begin_layout Standard
42587 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42595 set to be used and set the
42600 The itemize environment is described in section
42601 \begin_inset space ~
42605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42607 reference "sec:Itemize"
42614 \begin_layout Standard
42615 You can furthermore specify a
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42623 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42624 command of the desired character.
42625 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42632 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42638 \begin_inset space \space{}
42642 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42652 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42653 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42656 \begin_layout Standard
42657 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42665 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42666 -packages in the preamble (menu
42669 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42670 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42673 \begin_inset space ~
42679 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42683 usepackage{textcomp}
42686 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42690 usepackage{amssymb}
42700 \begin_layout Section
42704 \begin_layout Standard
42705 Branches are described in section
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42712 reference "sec:Branches"
42719 \begin_layout Section
42721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42723 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42730 \begin_layout Standard
42731 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42734 \begin_layout Description
42736 \begin_inset space ~
42740 \begin_inset space ~
42743 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42763 View Master Document
42764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42771 Update Master Document
42772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42779 menu or the toolbar.
42780 The default is set in
42782 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42783 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42785 \begin_inset space ~
42788 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42792 \begin_inset space ~
42796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42798 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42805 \begin_layout Description
42807 \begin_inset space ~
42811 \begin_inset space ~
42814 Output settings for the menu
42816 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42818 \begin_inset space ~
42824 For a detailed description see section
42826 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42831 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_layout Description
42841 \begin_inset space ~
42845 \begin_inset space ~
42848 Options offers settings for the export format
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42861 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42865 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42874 settings are described in detail in section
42876 Math Output in XHTML
42881 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset space ~
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42899 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42902 \begin_layout Section
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42913 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42915 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42917 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42922 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42923 -syntax is given in section
42924 \begin_inset space ~
42928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42930 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42937 \begin_layout Chapter
42943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42945 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42950 \begin_inset Index idx
42953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42962 \begin_layout Standard
42963 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42969 It has the following submenus.
42972 \begin_layout Section
42976 \begin_layout Subsection
42980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42981 User Interface File
42982 \begin_inset Index idx
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42986 Customization ! of toolbars
42992 \begin_inset Index idx
42995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42996 Customization ! of menus
43004 \begin_layout Standard
43005 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43006 interface (ui) file.
43007 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43015 \begin_layout Description
43020 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43023 \begin_layout Description
43030 the menu entries in popup context menus
43033 \begin_layout Description
43038 specifies the toolbar buttons
43041 \begin_layout Standard
43042 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43043 and edit the entries.
43046 \begin_layout Standard
43047 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43059 entries must be finished with an explicit
43084 and in the case of the
43085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43097 The syntax for the entries is:
43100 \begin_layout Standard
43101 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43132 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43135 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43136 -functions are listed in the menu
43138 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43140 \begin_inset space ~
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43149 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43156 For example, assuming you use the menu
43158 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43161 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43165 \begin_layout Standard
43166 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43190 \begin_layout Standard
43192 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43207 to have the sixth bookmark.
43210 \begin_layout Standard
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43219 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43220 's toolbar buttons.
43221 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43222 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43225 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43239 Enable tool tips in main work area
43241 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43249 \begin_layout Standard
43254 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43255 should display in the menu
43257 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43259 \begin_inset space ~
43267 \begin_layout Subsection
43271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43278 Restore window layouts and geometries
43281 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43282 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43289 Restore cursor positions
43291 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43295 \begin_layout Standard
43298 Load opened files from last session
43300 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43307 Clear all session information
43309 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43310 sessions (cursor positions, names
43311 of last opened documents, etc.).
43314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43318 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43323 \begin_inset Index idx
43326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43335 \begin_layout Standard
43338 Backup original documents when saving
43340 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43341 it was saved the last time.
43342 It is stored in the
43345 \begin_inset space ~
43351 \begin_inset space ~
43355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43357 reference "sec:Paths"
43361 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43364 \begin_inset space ~
43370 The backup file has the file extension
43371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43385 \begin_layout Standard
43388 Backup documents, every
43390 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43393 \begin_layout Standard
43396 Save documents compressed by default
43398 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43399 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43405 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43410 This applies to newly created documents only.
43411 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43415 Windows & work area
43418 \begin_layout Standard
43421 Open documents in tabs
43423 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43427 \begin_layout Standard
43432 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43445 reference "sec:Paths"
43449 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43456 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43457 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43458 of \SpecialChar LyX
43460 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43461 instance is created for each file.
43464 \begin_layout Standard
43467 Single close-tab button
43469 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43479 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43480 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43483 \begin_layout Standard
43484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43492 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43493 before the change takes effect.
43501 \begin_layout Standard
43506 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43508 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43510 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43514 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43515 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43516 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43519 \begin_layout Subsection
43521 \begin_inset Index idx
43524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43533 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43540 \begin_layout Standard
43541 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43545 \begin_layout Standard
43546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43554 This section only deals with the fonts
43558 the \SpecialChar LyX
43560 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43563 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43564 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43576 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43593 (depends on the system) as its
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_layout Standard
43613 You can change the font size with the
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43625 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43630 points have the size of 1
43631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43641 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43646 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43651 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43652 \begin_inset space ~
43656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43658 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43665 \begin_layout Standard
43668 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43670 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43671 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43672 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43673 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43674 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43676 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43683 \begin_layout Subsection
43685 \begin_inset Index idx
43688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43689 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43696 \begin_inset Index idx
43699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43708 \begin_layout Standard
43709 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43710 by choosing an item in the
43711 list and selecting the
43718 \begin_layout Standard
43719 By checking the option
43723 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43726 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43736 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43739 \begin_layout Subsection
43741 \begin_inset Index idx
43744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43754 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43758 \begin_layout Standard
43763 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43764 This feature is described in section
43765 \begin_inset space ~
43769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43771 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43778 \begin_layout Standard
43779 Checking the option
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43795 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43798 \begin_layout Section
43800 \begin_inset Index idx
43803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 \begin_layout Subsection
43816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43820 \begin_layout Standard
43823 Cursor follows scrollbar
43825 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43830 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43831 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43832 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43835 \begin_layout Standard
43838 Scroll below end of document
43840 is self-explanatory.
43843 \begin_layout Standard
43844 In \SpecialChar LyX
43845 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43852 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43854 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43855 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43858 \begin_layout Standard
43861 Sort environments alphabetically
43863 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43866 \begin_layout Standard
43869 Group environments by their category
43871 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43874 \begin_layout Standard
43879 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43894 \begin_layout Standard
43895 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43900 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43901 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43905 \begin_layout Subsection
43907 \begin_inset Index idx
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43917 \begin_inset Index idx
43920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 Settings ! Shortcuts
43929 \begin_layout Standard
43934 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43936 Several binding files are available, among them:
43939 \begin_layout Description
43940 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43943 \begin_layout Description
43944 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43956 \begin_layout Description
43957 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43968 \begin_layout Standard
43969 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43974 , and binding files for special languages.
43975 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43980 \begin_inset space \space{}
43984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43992 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43993 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43994 will try to use the appropriate binding
43998 \begin_layout Standard
43999 Some binding files, like
44003 , only have a limited scope.
44004 When looking at the end of the file
44008 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44011 \begin_layout Standard
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44024 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44025 in the selected key binding file.
44028 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44032 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44037 \begin_inset Index idx
44040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 Key Bindings ! Editing
44049 \begin_layout Standard
44050 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44051 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44052 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44053 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44056 Show key-bindings containing
44059 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44060 Insert there for example as keyword
44061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44068 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44069 functions that contain
44070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44078 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44079 All \SpecialChar LyX
44080 functions are also listed in the file
44085 that you will find in the
44092 \begin_layout Standard
44093 For example, to add the shortcut
44101 , select the function and press the
44106 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44107 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44110 \begin_layout Standard
44111 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44112 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44114 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44115 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44117 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44122 \begin_layout Standard
44123 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44126 \begin_layout Standard
44127 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44129 The syntax of the entries is:
44132 \begin_layout Standard
44138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44157 \begin_layout Subsection
44159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44161 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44166 \begin_inset Index idx
44169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44176 \begin_inset Index idx
44179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44180 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44188 \begin_layout Standard
44189 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44190 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44191 provides keyboard maps.
44192 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44193 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44196 \begin_inset space ~
44200 \begin_inset space ~
44205 and select the keyboard map file named
44212 \begin_layout Standard
44221 keyboard map and, if you use the
44225 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44228 arg "keymap-primary"
44234 arg "keymap-secondary"
44237 respectively or toggle between them with
44240 arg "keymap-toggle"
44246 \begin_layout Standard
44247 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44255 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44264 \begin_layout Standard
44265 You can also specify the mouse
44267 Wheel scrolling speed
44270 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44274 Middle mouse button pasting
44276 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44277 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44280 \begin_layout Standard
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44297 you can select a key for zooming.
44298 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44301 \begin_layout Subsection
44305 \begin_layout Standard
44306 Input completion is described in section
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44313 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44320 \begin_layout Section
44322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44329 \begin_inset Index idx
44332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44339 \begin_inset Index idx
44342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 \begin_layout Standard
44352 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44353 are normally determined during
44355 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44358 \begin_layout Description
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44363 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44364 's working directory.
44365 It is the default when you
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_layout Description
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44389 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44391 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44405 \begin_layout Description
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44410 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44416 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44420 \begin_inset Newline newline
44424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44436 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44437 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44445 \begin_layout Description
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44451 \begin_inset Index idx
44454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44460 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44461 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44468 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44476 will be used to save the backups.
44477 \begin_inset Newline newline
44480 Backup files have the ending
44481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44491 \begin_layout Description
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44496 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44497 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44499 \begin_inset Newline newline
44506 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44512 You can edit this file with the program
44521 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44522 in its preferences under
44525 \begin_inset space ~
44531 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44536 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44538 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44539 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44545 and \SpecialChar LyX
44546 need to be running the same time.
44547 \begin_inset Newline newline
44550 The pipe is also used for the
44555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44561 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44566 \begin_inset Newline newline
44569 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44570 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44571 \begin_inset Newline newline
44587 \begin_layout Description
44589 \begin_inset space ~
44592 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44595 \begin_layout Description
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44600 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44601 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44602 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44605 \begin_layout Description
44607 \begin_inset space ~
44610 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44616 You only need to specify it if you are using
44620 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44622 For \SpecialChar LyX
44627 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44631 \begin_layout Description
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44636 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44637 When \SpecialChar LyX
44638 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44639 to find it on the system.
44640 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44642 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44651 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44652 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44655 \begin_layout Description
44657 \begin_inset space ~
44660 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44661 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44662 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44663 code or in the document
44665 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44667 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44668 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44669 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44670 scanned for the input files.
44671 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44672 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44674 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44675 compilation may fail for some documents.
44678 \begin_layout Section
44682 \begin_layout Standard
44683 Here you can insert your
44692 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44700 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44704 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44707 \begin_layout Section
44709 \begin_inset Index idx
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 Language ! Settings
44719 \begin_inset Index idx
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44723 Settings ! Language
44731 \begin_layout Subsection
44733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44735 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44742 \begin_layout Description
44744 \begin_inset space ~
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44751 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44753 You can find its actual translation status here:
44754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44756 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44763 \begin_layout Description
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44768 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44769 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44770 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44771 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44788 The most widespread language package is
44793 \begin_inset Index idx
44796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44803 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44805 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44806 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44807 come with the alternative
44813 \begin_inset Index idx
44816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 -packages ! polyglossia
44823 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44824 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44830 The available selections are described in section
44831 \begin_inset space ~
44835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44837 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44844 \begin_layout Description
44846 \begin_inset space ~
44849 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44850 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44851 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44852 An example is the start command
44858 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44860 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44864 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44879 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44884 \begin_layout Description
44886 \begin_inset space ~
44894 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44895 command toggles the package on and off.
44898 \begin_layout Description
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44904 \begin_inset space ~
44907 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44911 \begin_layout Description
44913 \begin_inset space ~
44917 \begin_inset space ~
44920 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44924 \begin_layout Description
44926 \begin_inset space ~
44930 \begin_inset space ~
44933 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44934 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44935 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44937 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44944 \begin_layout Description
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44949 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44951 When this option is not set, the
44954 \begin_inset space ~
44959 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44961 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44972 \begin_layout Description
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44980 \begin_inset space ~
44986 When it is not set, the
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44994 is set to the end of the document.
44997 \begin_layout Description
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45006 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45007 language will be underlined in blue.
45010 \begin_layout Description
45012 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45019 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45020 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45023 \begin_layout Description
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45028 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45029 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45030 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45031 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45034 \begin_layout Subsection
45038 \begin_layout Standard
45039 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45046 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45053 \begin_layout Section
45057 \begin_layout Subsection
45061 \begin_layout Description
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45066 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45068 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45076 For a detailed description see section
45078 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45091 \begin_layout Description
45093 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45108 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45111 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45112 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45120 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45123 \begin_layout Description
45125 \begin_inset space ~
45129 \begin_inset Index idx
45132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45139 \begin_inset Index idx
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 Settings ! Date format
45148 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45149 \begin_inset Newline newline
45153 \begin_inset Flex URL
45156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45158 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45164 \begin_inset Newline newline
45167 For example the format
45168 \begin_inset Newline newline
45172 \begin_inset Newline newline
45175 prints the date as day/month/year.
45178 \begin_layout Description
45180 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45187 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45188 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45198 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45200 \begin_inset space ~
45206 For a detailed description see section
45208 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_layout Subsection
45227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45229 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45234 \begin_inset Index idx
45237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45247 \begin_layout Description
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_inset space ~
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45264 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45269 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45290 are used for Cyrillic.
45291 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45304 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45306 sets up in the background.
45307 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45310 \begin_layout Description
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45320 \begin_inset space ~
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45327 options They only have an effect when the program
45331 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45334 \begin_layout Standard
45335 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45336 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45337 manuals of the applications.
45340 \begin_layout Description
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45345 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45352 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45359 \begin_layout Description
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45364 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45371 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45378 \begin_layout Description
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45383 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45390 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45397 \begin_layout Description
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45406 command Command for the program
45408 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45411 that is described in the section
45413 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45418 Additional Features
45423 \begin_layout Standard
45424 There are additionally the following options:
45427 \begin_layout Description
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45433 \begin_inset space ~
45437 \begin_inset space ~
45441 \begin_inset space ~
45446 \begin_inset space ~
45449 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45467 to separate folders.
45468 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45470 \begin_inset Index idx
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45480 \begin_inset Index idx
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 \begin_layout Description
45494 \begin_inset space ~
45498 \begin_inset space ~
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45506 \begin_inset space ~
45510 \begin_inset space ~
45514 \begin_inset space ~
45517 changes Removes all manually set
45523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45526 \begin_inset space ~
45531 dialog when changing the document class.
45534 \begin_layout Section
45536 \begin_inset space ~
45540 \begin_inset Index idx
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45552 \begin_layout Subsection
45554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45556 name "subsec:Converters"
45561 \begin_inset Index idx
45564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45573 \begin_layout Standard
45574 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45575 from one format to another.
45576 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45577 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45589 field and press the
45594 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45598 \begin_inset space ~
45603 drop-down list, modify the
45607 field and press the
45614 \begin_layout Standard
45617 Converter File Cache
45623 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45625 Maximum Age (in days
45628 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45629 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45632 \begin_layout Standard
45633 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45634 definition, is described in the section
45645 \begin_layout Subsection
45647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45649 name "sec:File-Formats"
45654 \begin_inset Index idx
45657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45664 \begin_inset Index idx
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45676 \begin_layout Standard
45677 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45687 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45690 \begin_layout Standard
45691 You can also define the
45693 Default output format
45695 that is used when you use
45697 View, Update, View Master Document
45701 Update Master Document
45707 menu or the toolbar.
45710 \begin_layout Standard
45711 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45722 \begin_layout Standard
45723 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45725 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45726 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45727 This is done by specifying a
45732 More about this is described in the section
45743 \begin_layout Chapter
45744 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45746 \begin_inset Index idx
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45758 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45767 \begin_inset space ~
45771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45773 reference "tab:Units"
45777 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45778 and used in this documentation.
45781 \begin_layout Standard
45782 \begin_inset Float table
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45789 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 \begin_inset Tabular
45816 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45817 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 scaled point (65536
46027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46105 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46178 % of original image width
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46494 \begin_layout Chapter
46496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46498 name "chap:Credits"
46505 \begin_layout Standard
46506 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46507 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46510 \begin_layout Itemize
46513 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46516 \begin_layout Itemize
46522 \begin_layout Itemize
46528 \begin_layout Itemize
46534 \begin_layout Itemize
46540 \begin_layout Itemize
46546 \begin_layout Itemize
46552 \begin_layout Itemize
46558 \begin_layout Itemize
46561 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46564 \begin_layout Itemize
46570 \begin_layout Itemize
46576 \begin_layout Itemize
46582 \begin_layout Itemize
46588 \begin_layout Itemize
46594 \begin_layout Itemize
46600 \begin_layout Itemize
46606 \begin_layout Itemize
46612 \begin_layout Itemize
46613 The \SpecialChar LyX
46615 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46624 \begin_layout Standard
46625 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46628 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46635 \begin_layout Bibliography
46636 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46637 LatexCommand bibitem
46643 The \SpecialChar LyX
46645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46648 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46653 \begin_inset Newline newline
46657 \begin_inset Flex URL
46660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46662 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46670 \begin_layout Bibliography
46671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46672 LatexCommand bibitem
46673 key "latexcompanion"
46677 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46679 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46680 Companion Second Edition.
46683 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46686 \begin_layout Bibliography
46687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46688 LatexCommand bibitem
46693 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46696 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46700 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46703 \begin_layout Bibliography
46704 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46705 LatexCommand bibitem
46713 : A Document Preparation System.
46716 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46719 \begin_layout Bibliography
46720 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46721 LatexCommand bibitem
46730 The \SpecialChar TeX
46734 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46737 \begin_layout Bibliography
46738 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46739 LatexCommand bibitem
46744 The \SpecialChar TeX
46746 \begin_inset Newline newline
46750 \begin_inset Flex URL
46753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46755 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46763 \begin_layout Bibliography
46764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46765 LatexCommand bibitem
46770 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46772 \begin_inset Newline newline
46776 \begin_inset Flex URL
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46781 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46789 \begin_layout Bibliography
46790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46791 LatexCommand bibitem
46797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46799 name "Documentation"
46800 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46806 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46810 \begin_inset Newline newline
46814 \begin_inset Flex URL
46817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46819 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46827 \begin_layout Bibliography
46828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46829 LatexCommand bibitem
46835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46837 name "Documentation"
46838 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46842 how to use the program
46844 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46848 \begin_inset Newline newline
46852 \begin_inset Flex URL
46855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46857 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46865 \begin_layout Bibliography
46866 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46867 LatexCommand bibitem
46873 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46875 name "Documentation"
46876 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46885 \begin_inset Newline newline
46889 \begin_inset Flex URL
46892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46894 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46902 \begin_layout Bibliography
46903 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46904 LatexCommand bibitem
46905 key "makeindex-man"
46910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46913 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46922 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 \begin_inset Flex URL
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46931 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46939 \begin_layout Bibliography
46940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46941 LatexCommand bibitem
46947 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46949 name "Documentation"
46950 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46959 \begin_inset Newline newline
46963 \begin_inset Flex URL
46966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46968 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46976 \begin_layout Bibliography
46977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46978 LatexCommand bibitem
46984 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46986 name "Documentation"
46987 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46991 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46993 \begin_inset Newline newline
46997 \begin_inset Flex URL
47000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47002 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47010 \begin_layout Bibliography
47011 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47012 LatexCommand bibitem
47018 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47020 name "Documentation"
47021 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47025 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47031 \begin_inset Index idx
47034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47036 -packages ! caption
47042 \begin_inset Newline newline
47046 \begin_inset Flex URL
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47051 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47059 \begin_layout Bibliography
47060 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47061 LatexCommand bibitem
47067 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47069 name "Documentation"
47070 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47074 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47080 \begin_inset Index idx
47083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47085 -packages ! enumitem
47091 \begin_inset Newline newline
47095 \begin_inset Flex URL
47098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47100 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47108 \begin_layout Bibliography
47109 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47110 LatexCommand bibitem
47116 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47118 name "Documentation"
47119 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47123 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47129 \begin_inset Index idx
47132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47134 -packages ! fancyhdr
47140 \begin_inset Newline newline
47144 \begin_inset Flex URL
47147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47149 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47157 \begin_layout Bibliography
47158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47159 LatexCommand bibitem
47165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47167 name "Documentation"
47168 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47172 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47178 \begin_inset Index idx
47181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47183 -packages ! hyperref
47189 \begin_inset Newline newline
47193 \begin_inset Flex URL
47196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47198 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47206 \begin_layout Bibliography
47207 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47208 LatexCommand bibitem
47214 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47216 name "Documentation"
47217 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47221 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47227 \begin_inset Index idx
47230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47232 -packages ! nomencl
47238 \begin_inset Newline newline
47242 \begin_inset Flex URL
47245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47247 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47255 \begin_layout Bibliography
47256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47257 LatexCommand bibitem
47263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47265 name "Documentation"
47266 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47270 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47276 \begin_inset Index idx
47279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47281 -packages ! prettyref
47287 \begin_inset Newline newline
47291 \begin_inset Flex URL
47294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47296 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47304 \begin_layout Bibliography
47305 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47306 LatexCommand bibitem
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47314 name "Documentation"
47315 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47319 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47325 \begin_inset Index idx
47328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47330 -packages ! refstyle
47336 \begin_inset Newline newline
47340 \begin_inset Flex URL
47343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47345 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47353 \begin_layout Bibliography
47354 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47355 LatexCommand bibitem
47361 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47364 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47368 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47370 \begin_inset Newline newline
47374 \begin_inset Flex URL
47377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47379 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47387 \begin_layout Bibliography
47388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47389 LatexCommand bibitem
47395 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47398 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47402 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47404 \begin_inset Newline newline
47408 \begin_inset Flex URL
47411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47413 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47421 \begin_layout Bibliography
47422 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47423 LatexCommand bibitem
47429 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47432 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47436 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47437 for Cyrillic languages:
47438 \begin_inset Newline newline
47442 \begin_inset Flex URL
47445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47447 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47455 \begin_layout Bibliography
47456 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47457 LatexCommand bibitem
47463 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47466 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47470 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47472 \begin_inset Newline newline
47476 \begin_inset Flex URL
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47489 \begin_layout Bibliography
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47491 LatexCommand bibitem
47497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47500 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47504 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47506 \begin_inset Newline newline
47510 \begin_inset Flex URL
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47523 \begin_layout Bibliography
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47525 LatexCommand bibitem
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47534 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47538 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47540 \begin_inset Newline newline
47544 \begin_inset Flex URL
47547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47549 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47557 \begin_layout Bibliography
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47559 LatexCommand bibitem
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47568 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47572 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47574 \begin_inset Newline newline
47578 \begin_inset Flex URL
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47583 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47591 \begin_layout Bibliography
47592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47593 LatexCommand bibitem
47599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47602 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47606 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47608 \begin_inset Newline newline
47612 \begin_inset Flex URL
47615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47617 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47625 \begin_layout Bibliography
47626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47627 LatexCommand bibitem
47633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47636 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47640 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47642 \begin_inset Newline newline
47646 \begin_inset Flex URL
47649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47659 \begin_layout Bibliography
47660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47661 LatexCommand bibitem
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47670 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47674 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47676 \begin_inset Newline newline
47680 \begin_inset Flex URL
47683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47685 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47693 \begin_layout Bibliography
47694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47695 LatexCommand bibitem
47701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47704 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47708 about new features in
47714 \begin_inset Newline newline
47718 \begin_inset Flex URL
47721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47723 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47731 \begin_layout Standard
47732 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47766 \begin_inset Note Note
47769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47776 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47777 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47778 bibliography is the second one:
47786 \begin_layout Standard
47787 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47788 LatexCommand bibtex
47789 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47790 options "biblio/alphadin"
47797 \begin_layout Standard
47798 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47802 \begin_layout Standard
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47804 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47810 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47811 LatexCommand printindex